JP7464169B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Pachinko machines, which shoot game balls into a game area to play a game, are known as a type of gaming machine. For example, there is a pachinko machine that is equipped with a variable ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V entry port) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312

However, with conventional gaming machines like those mentioned above, the gameplay can easily become monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
A variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter the ball;
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined ball is entered into the special ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is configured to allow only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the inner area,
This gaming machine is
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
The game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entry means is configured to be changed by a variable means capable of changing the value of a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined route to the special ball entry means by changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
The variable means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means;
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one at a time;
A ball passage capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a restricting means is provided which allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball from passing in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game balls that have entered the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means are configured not to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter,
The ball passage is configured such that an entrance area is provided at only one location, and only the game ball that has passed through the entrance area can be guided to the specific area;
A game ball that does not pass through the entrance area of the ball passage is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area,
The gist of the device is that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second trigger ball entry means, the variable means acts on the gaming balls that pass through the specific area from the one after the one that entered, thereby changing the value of the gaming balls that flow down .

The gaming machine of the present invention can dramatically increase interest.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. A front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, rear pack unit, etc. in an open state. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the correct/incorrect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable time determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a ball counting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special prize winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing non-special prize-winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special gate passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing type-based ball scoring processing. A flowchart showing the V-winning jackpot setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing variable winning device control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a termination setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a blade member opening/closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start prize section control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a third display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a bypass mechanism control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a remaining ball monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. A front view of the central winning unit. 6A to 6C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route allocation member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a route allocation member. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body unit. 1A is a front view showing a rotating body unit with a movable part in a stored state, and FIG. 1B is a front view showing a rotating body unit with a movable part in a protruding state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable part and its related configuration in a stored state, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable part and its related configuration in a protruding state. FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining a route allocation member and the like according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional front view for explaining a route allocation area and the like according to another embodiment.

One embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the machine, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed. However, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories arranged on the game board 30 surface, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted in FIG. 3.

As shown in FIG. 6, the outer frame 11 is made up of an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy extrusion. These frame components 11a to 11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape by removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right frame component 11d also has an extension wall 83 that protrudes from the rear end of the right frame component 11d toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extension wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is engaged. Also, a pressing portion 86 that abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 (described later) is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 and protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

In addition, a resin valance panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the upper surface of the valance panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the valance panel 87 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as its axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 is designed to be able to be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly elliptical window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed structure of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a lower tray 15 is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball receiving tray, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower tray 15 is provided at the front side of the lower tray 15.

A performance button 125 is provided to the left of the bottom tray 15. When the player presses the performance button 125, a specific performance is performed or the performance content is changed on the performance display device 42, which will be described later.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 protruding toward the front is provided to the right of the lower tray 15. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the operation part of the handle 18.

When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, game balls are launched by the launching device 60 (described below) as a launching means, with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation. The handle 18 is also provided with a launch prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of game balls by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is being held. For this reason, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the launch of game balls, or to temporarily stop the launch of game balls while holding the handle 18.

An upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them in a row toward the launching device 60, which will be described later. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are dispensed are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. However, in pachinko machines in which game balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device, etc. to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary.

Furthermore, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) that is provided downstream of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicates with the lower tray 15 opens, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. In other words, the player can move the game balls in the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means are controlled to change their light emission state, such as turning on or blinking, depending on changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play.

For example, a circular illumination section 102 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window section 101. Error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a specified error occurs are provided on both sides of the circular illumination section 102. In addition, a number of small through holes are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 of the circular illumination section 102 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see Figure 3) provided on the rear of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately as in the conventional method, but is round overall and is assembled and then attached.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 (described later) to the discharge outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71).

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 etc. A launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched from the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39 (game board 30). In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60.

In this embodiment, when game balls are continuously detected by the full detection switch for a predetermined period of time, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from firing. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer continuously detected for a predetermined period of time), the launching device 60 is permitted to fire.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60. The ball feeder 63 uses a driving means such as a solenoid to guide the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launcher 60.

In addition, the symbol 67 in Figures 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost completely close the exit of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the entrance side of the lower tray communication passage 71. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the entrances (ball inlet portions) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to the payout passage 67 with a predetermined distance between them, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray communication passage 71, and are paid out through the lower tray communication passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion abutting the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, approximately the center of the front part of the game board 30, which becomes the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

The structure of the game board 30 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is made up of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. The rail 50 may also be a ball passage. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. In addition, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. A game ball that is launched with a force greater than a predetermined value will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward approximately the center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53 serving as a regulating means, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. The area in which the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged may be the specific area. If a game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

The game board 30 also has a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting winning means, a through gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a variable winning means, etc., which are arranged in through holes formed by router processing and attached from the front side of the game board 30.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that detect game balls that enter various ball entry means, such as the general winning section 31.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, a first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33a, a second start winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second start winning section 33b, and a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) any of the various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. For example, if the ball enters the starting winning section 33, three prize balls are paid out; if the ball enters the general winning section 31, five prize balls are paid out; and if the ball enters the variable winning device 32, ten prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, and game balls that do not win in the various winning means such as the general winning section 31 are discharged outside the game area through this outlet 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 4 and Figures 40 to 45.

The central winning unit 37 is disposed in approximately the center of the play area (game board 30). The central winning unit 37 comprises a housing (center frame) 400 that forms an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the play area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent material, and the internal area 401 can be seen through the front panel 402.

A pair of ball entry openings 403 are formed on the upper part of the housing 400, which serve as entrances for game balls flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401. The central winning unit 37 is also provided with a pair of blade members 404 on the left and right for opening and closing the ball entry openings 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. The "blade members 404" constitute the "opening and closing members" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is arranged so that it can rotate between a closed position in which it closes the corresponding ball entry opening 403, and an open position in which it opens it. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot enter). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is open and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (ball can enter).

Although more details will be described later, the blade members 404 open for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) and a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entry. In this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in sync with each other, so that when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, the other is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 is divided into a route allocation area 406 where the game ball that enters through the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a win/lose lottery area 407 located below it, a type lottery area 408 located further below that as a type lottery area, and a role activation lottery area 409 located to the right of the win/lose lottery area 407.

First, the route allocation area 406 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 40 to 42. The route allocation area 406 includes an introduction passage 601 that guides the game ball that entered the internal area 401 from the ball entrance opening 403 to the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400 and then guides it to the center of the route allocation area 406 in the left-right direction, a fall passage 602 that drops the game ball led out from the exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 that opens in the center of the left-right direction of the route allocation area 406 downward, a route allocation member 603 as a route allocation means provided at the bottom of the fall passage 602, a normal guide passage 604 that is provided to the left of the route allocation member 603 and can guide the game ball to the winning/losing lottery area 407, and a special guide passage (special passage) 605 that is provided to the right of the route allocation member 603 and can guide the game ball to the role activation lottery area 409.

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route," and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route."

The pair of left and right entrances 601b of the introduction passage 601 are each provided with an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball that has entered through the ball entry opening 403.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the ball entry opening 403 on the left side always passes through the left entrance 601b, and a game ball that enters the ball entry opening 403 on the right side always passes through the right entrance 601b, so that a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route allocation member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having an axial hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece 613 protruding upward from the shaft portion 611, a left piece 614 protruding leftward from the shaft portion 611, and a right piece 615 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 611.

Axle pin 610 is inserted through shaft hole 611a of shaft portion 611. The rear end of the shaft pin 610 is supported by upper rear wall portion 400a that defines the rear side of fall passage 602, and the front end is supported by front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) that defines the front side of fall passage 602. As a result, route allocation member 603 is supported so as to be rotatable around shaft pin 610.

In addition, a protrusion 617 having a generally triangular shape in front view is formed at a lower position of the route allocation member 603. Under normal circumstances, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route allocation member 603 is maintained in a right-inclined state in which the central piece 613 is inclined to the right of the center position in the left-right direction (position of the pivot pin 610) and the right piece 615 is inclined downward from the horizontal direction by a biasing means (maintenance means) such as a weight or coil spring (not shown).

In this rightward tilted state, the tip 613a of the central piece 613 comes into contact with or is close to the right side wall 602a of the fall passage 602, preventing game balls falling down the fall passage 602 from flowing down into the special guide passage 605 on the right, but allowing them to flow down into the normal guide passage 604 on the left.

In other words, during normal operation when the route allocation member 603 is inclined to the right, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route allocation member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is open, and the game ball falling down the fall passage 602 is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 along the left guide surface formed by the left side surface of the central piece 613 and the top surface of the left piece 614 of the route allocation member 603.

As a result, the route allocation member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614 (see Figure 41 (b)).

As a result, for a specified period of time, the route allocation member 603 is in a left-tilted state in which the central piece 613 is tilted to the left of the center position in the left-right direction (position of the pivot pin 610) and the left piece 614 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is biased against the left inclined surface of the protrusion 617.

In this leftward tilted state, the tip 613a of the central piece 613 comes into contact with or is close to the left side wall 602b of the fall passage 602, so that the game balls falling down the fall passage 602 cannot flow down into the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, but can flow down into the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

In other words, during the specified time that the route allocating member 603 is in the left-tilted state, the normal guide passage 604 is closed by the route allocating member 603, while the special guide passage 605 is open. As a result, if there is a game ball falling down the falling passage 602 at this timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, a second game ball B2 falling continuously after a first game ball B1 guided to the normal guide passage 604), the game ball will be guided to the right special guide passage 605 along the right guide surface formed by the right side surface of the central piece 613 and the upper surface of the right piece 615 of the route allocating member 603.

Once the route allocation member 603 is tilted to the left, it rotates clockwise due to the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the force from the game ball contacting the right piece 615 is also added) and returns to the normal right-inclined state (see Figure 41 (c)).

In this embodiment, the state in which the route allocation member 603 is in the first posture, which is a right-inclined posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route allocation member 603 is in the second posture, which is a left-inclined posture, corresponds to the second state. Also, in this embodiment, the states in which the route allocation member 603 can cause game balls to flow down the first route consisting of the normal guide passage 604, etc., or the second route consisting of the special guide passage 605, etc., such as the first state and the second state, constitute specific states. Of course, the specific states are not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the configuration of the special feature operation lottery area 409 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the special feature operation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide passage 605 can enter (pass). The passage width of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, game balls that pass through the special gate 650 are discharged outside the internal area 401 (to the rear side of the game board 30) via a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "trigger ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 that detects game balls passing through it. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "trigger ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by this special gate switch 651, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722 described below. If the activation assist lottery is won, the movable role 722 will operate for a predetermined period of time. Details of the configuration and operation of the movable role 722 will be described later.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, no prize balls are paid out (0 prize balls). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651.

Next, the configuration of the winning/losing lottery area 407 will be described in detail. The winning/losing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotating body unit 410 as a winning/losing allocation means. The rotating body unit 410 has the function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided from the route allocation area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401. The passage width of the normal guide passage 604 is set to a width that allows the game balls to pass through one at a time.

As shown in Figures 43 and 44, the rotating unit 410 includes a unit base 411 that serves as the base, and a unit cover 412 that is attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side of the unit base 411.

A roughly disk-shaped rotating body 414 is attached to a mounting stand 413 that protrudes from the upper surface of the unit base 411, and a rotating body motor 415 is attached to rotate the rotating body 414. On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided on the lower surface of the unit base 411.

The rotating body 414 is installed so that its upper surface faces diagonally upward toward the front side, and the rotation axis is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. The rotating body motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261. With this configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a fixed direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) at a fixed cycle.

The rotating body 414 has three pockets 416 formed around its outer periphery, each capable of receiving one game ball. The three pockets 416 are divided into one special pocket 416a and the other two non-special pockets 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416b opens toward the outer periphery and upward of the rotating body 414 and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 slopes downward toward the outer periphery of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a opens to the top and bottom on the outer periphery side of the rotating body 414, and does not have a bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b. In addition, the periphery of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a resin material that is colored differently from the other portions. This makes it easier for players to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b.

The unit cover 412 has a generally cylindrical wall portion 431 that is arranged to surround the rotor 414, and a stage portion 432 that is formed to extend from the periphery of the wall portion 431 toward the outer periphery.

The upper edge of the tube wall portion 431 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 is provided in front of it to connect the inner and outer circumferential sides of the tube wall portion 431.

The upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured to allow the game ball to roll. The portion of the stage portion 432 located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the tube wall portion 431, and the portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the rear (toward the gate portion 435).

As a result, the game ball is guided out of the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604 that opens into the central rear wall 400b of the housing 400 that defines the rear side of the win/lose lottery area 407, and guided to the rear of the stage section 432. While its movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall section 431, the game ball rolls clockwise or counterclockwise toward the front on the stage section 432, and swings back and forth multiple times in front of the gate section 435, and then enters the pocket section 416 when the relative positions of the gate section 435 and the pocket section 416 (special pocket section 416a or non-special pocket section 416b) of the rotating body 414 match.

Furthermore, the unit base 411 is provided with a first V winning passage 427 for guiding game balls contained in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and an out passage 428 for discharging game balls contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b out of the internal area 401.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 in the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotor 414, that is, to the right of the gate portion 435. On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream of the first V winning passage 427, that is, at the far right position of the first V winning passage 427.

The entrance side of the first V winning passage 427 opens on the top surface of the installation table 413, and is configured so that the pocket section 416 of the rotating body 414 can pass above it. A game ball that enters the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate section 435 falls downward from the special pocket section 416a and enters the first V winning passage 427 when the special pocket section 416a and the entrance section of the first V winning passage 427 coincide with each other as the rotating body 414 rotates. At the position corresponding to the first V winning passage 427, a cylindrical wall section 431 that protrudes downward from the back surface of the stage section 432 prevents the game ball from falling out from the side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, even if the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 coincide with each other as the rotating body 414 rotates, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b prevents the game ball contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b from falling (entering) into the first V winning passage 427.

In addition, at a position corresponding to the out passage 428, a notch 431a is formed in the lower edge of the tube wall 431. As a result, when the rotating body 414 rotates further and the position of the non-special pocket 416b containing the game ball matches the position of the out passage 428, the game ball contained in the non-special pocket 416b moves to the outer periphery of the rotating body 414 due to the inclination of the bottom wall 417, and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch 431a of the tube wall 431.

In addition, a connection passage 429 is formed in the housing 400, which is connected to the outlet of the first V winning passage 427, and the first V winning passage 427 and the type lottery area 408 are in communication with each other through the connection passage 429.

The first V winning passage 427 is also provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing through the passage. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. Therefore, the "first V winning passage 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

When a big win occurs when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427, the big prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from a closed state to an open state, and then one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached after the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 is considered one special prize state, and this is repeated a specified number of times (specified rounds).

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot states are set as a "3-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "15-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 15 times.

However, as will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, when a ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the jackpot state is not initiated immediately, but rather the type of jackpot state is determined in the type selection area 408, and then the jackpot state is initiated.

As described above, in this embodiment, a game ball that enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passes through the first V winning passage 427 is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461, and is guided to the type lottery area 408.

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special ball entry detection switch 462 that detects game balls that pass through it and are discharged outside the internal area 401.

In addition, a protrusion 440 is provided on the upper edge of the tube wall 431 in a circumferentially specific section including above the entrances of the first V-winning passage 427 and the out passage 428, and is formed to extend toward the inner periphery of the tube wall 431.

The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover from above a portion of each pocket portion 416 located below it (an area approximately half the diameter of the rotating body 414). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which another game ball rides up on top of a game ball that has entered a specific pocket portion 416, causing the two game balls, one above the other, to enter the first V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428 in succession, or in which a game ball jumps over the tube wall portion 431 for some reason and enters directly into a pocket portion 416 that is located in a position that coincides with the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428.

As shown in Figures 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism 721 is provided at the rear of the rotating body unit 410. The bypass mechanism 721 includes a movable part 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening housing 433 formed at the most upstream part of the stage 432, and a movable part solenoid 725 as a movable member driving means for operating the movable part 722. The movable part solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by a main control device 261 constituting a movable body control means.

The movable part 722 is assembled so that it can slide (rise and fall) in the vertical direction. In normal operation when the movable part solenoid 725 is in a non-excited state, the movable part 722 is almost entirely housed within the opening housing 433, and its upper surface is generally continuous with the upper surface of the stage 432 (see Figures 44(a) and 45(a)). This housing state of the movable part 722 corresponds to the non-favourable state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 725 for the movable part is excited and the bypass mechanism 721 is activated, the movable part 722 rises and a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage 432 (see Figures 44(b) and 45(b)). Such an operation of the movable part 722 corresponds to a predetermined operation in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable part 722 corresponds to an advantageous state in this embodiment.

The top surface of the movable part 722 is formed with a left inclined portion 727 that slopes gently downward from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the left, and a right inclined portion 728 that slopes gently downward from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right.

And, under normal circumstances when almost the entire movable part 722 is housed within the opening housing section 433, the game ball guided from the exit section 604a of the normal guide passage 604 that opens into the central rear wall section 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable part 722 is guided to the left or right of the stage section 432 by the left inclined section 727 or the right inclined section 728 on the top surface of the movable part 722.

As shown in Figs. 45(a) and (b), a second V winning passage 730 is provided inside the movable device 722. The passage width of the second V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time.

When the movable part 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the movable part 722 blocks the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a of the second V winning passage 730 and the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 face each other (see Figures 44(b) and 45(b)). This allows the game ball to enter the second V winning passage 730 from the normal guide passage 604, and both passages 604, 730 are connected.

In addition, when the movable part 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the outlet portion 730b of the second V winning passage 730 faces the inlet portion 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the back side of the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400. This allows game balls to enter the bypass passage 737 from the second V winning passage 730, and both passages 730, 737 are connected.

In other words, when the movable part 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are connected via the second V winning passage 730 so that the game ball can pass through.

The width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, the exit portion 737b of the bypass passage 737 opens in the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400 that defines the rear side of the type lottery area 408, at a position above the 15R ball entrance 731. As a result, when the movable role 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the game ball that is normally guided to the guide passage 604 can be guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731 without going through the above-mentioned rotating body unit 410 and the type allocation mechanism unit 741 described later. In other words, by operating the movable role 722, it is possible to avoid allocation by the rotating body unit 410 and the type allocation mechanism unit 741.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing through the bypass passage 737. When a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted.

However, as will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, when a ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not initiated immediately, but is instead initiated after the game ball enters the 15R ball entry port 731.

In addition, when there is a game ball remaining in the second V winning passage 730, if the movable device 722 descends and returns to the stored state, the remaining ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 via the lower passage 739 and is configured to be detected by the second special winning ball detection switch 738.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738, 10 game balls are dispensed onto the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15). Of course, the number of game balls dispensed in response to these ball entry detection switches is not limited to 10, and may be another number. Also, when a game ball is detected by these ball entry detection switches, no game balls may be dispensed (0 prize balls).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot generated when the game ball enters the first V entry passage 427" and "jackpot generated when the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V entry passage 730" may be referred to collectively as "V entry jackpot."

Next, the type-based lottery area 408 will be described in detail. The type-based lottery area 408 is provided with a 15R ball entry port 731 that, when a game ball enters, grants a "15 round" jackpot state (15 round jackpot), a 7R ball entry port 732 that, when a game ball enters, grants a "7 round" jackpot state (7 round jackpot), and a 3R ball entry port 733 that, when a game ball enters, grants a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot). Here, the "15R ball entry port 731", "7R ball entry port 732" and "3R ball entry port 733" constitute the "type-based ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The 15R entrance 731 is provided with a 15R entrance detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that enters here. Similarly, the 7R entrance 732 is provided with a 7R entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that enters here, and the 3R entrance 733 is provided with a 3R entrance detection switch 736 that detects a game ball that enters here.

The type lottery area 408 is provided with a type allocation mechanism 741 as a type allocation means (type determination means) that allocates the destination of the game balls led to the type lottery area 408 via the first V winning passage 427 and the connecting passage 429 to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733.

The type sorting mechanism 741 includes a starting platform 742 to which the game balls drawn out from the exit 429a of the connecting passage 429 are guided, a first crossing board 744 to which the game balls that have passed through the starting platform 742 are guided, a second crossing board 745 to which the game balls that have passed through the first crossing board 744 are guided, and a 15R guide passage 746 to which the game balls that have passed through the second crossing board 745 are guided and which guides the game balls to the 15R ball entrance 731.

The starting platform 742 is located in the upper left corner of the type selection area 408, and its top surface slopes downward to the right.

The first cross plate 744 is installed to the right of and slightly below the starting platform 742, with its left end supported so that it can rotate around its axis in the front-to-rear direction, and its right end being the free end.

The rotation axis of the first bridge plate 744 is connected to a swing mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism is driven and controlled by the main control device 261, so that the first bridge plate 744 swings up and down.

Specifically, the first crossing plate 744 is configured so that its upper surface is slightly inclined downward to the right, allowing it to move between a forward position where it guides the game ball to the second crossing plate 745, and a drop position where its upper surface is inclined more downward than this, allowing it to guide the game ball to the 3R ball entrance 733.

When the game ball guided to the first transfer plate 744 via the starting platform 742 rolls to the right end of the first transfer plate 744, if the first transfer plate 744 is in the forward position, the game ball is guided to the second transfer plate 745.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the first crossing plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first crossing plate 744, if the first crossing plate 744 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball is guided to the 3R ball entrance 733.

In other words, the first crossing board 744 has the function of directing the destination of the game ball guided via the starting platform 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second crossing board 745.

The second cross plate 745 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first cross plate 744, with its left end supported so that it can rotate around its axis in the front-to-rear direction, and its right end being the free end.

The rotation axis of the second bridge plate 745 is connected to a swing mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism is driven and controlled by the main control device 261, so that the second bridge plate 745 swings up and down.

Specifically, the second crossing plate 745 is configured so that its upper surface is slightly inclined downward to the right, allowing it to move between a forward position where it guides the game ball to the 15R guide passage 746, and a drop position where its upper surface is inclined more significantly downward, allowing it to guide the game ball to the 7R ball entrance 732.

When the game ball guided to the second transfer plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second transfer plate 745, if the second transfer plate 745 is in the forward position, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the second crossing plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second crossing plate 745, if the second crossing plate 745 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball is guided to the 7R ball entrance 732.

In other words, the second crossing plate 745 has the function of directing the destination of the game ball that passes through the first crossing plate 744 to either the 7R ball entrance 732 or the 15R guide passage 746.

The 15R guide passage 746 is located to the right and slightly below the second crossing board 745, and its upper surface slopes downward toward the 15R entrance 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first and second crossing plates 744 and 745 are configured to oscillate at different cycles. For example, the first crossing plate 744 is configured to oscillate slightly faster than the second crossing plate 745.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734, the 7R ball detection switch 735, or the 3R ball detection switch 736 after the first special ball detection switch 461 detects a ball, a jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. Also, if a ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734 after the second special ball detection switch 738 detects a ball, a jackpot state corresponding to a 15-round jackpot is started.

Now, we return to the explanation of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. 4, the first start winning section 33a is provided to the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37. The second start winning section 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37.

The second start winning section 33b further includes a pair of start opening opening/closing members 33c that can be opened and closed on both sides. In this embodiment, when the start opening opening/closing members 33c are in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second start winning section 33b.

In other words, the first start winning section 33a is always open to game balls, whereas the second start winning section 33b opens the start opening opening member 33c when a game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the ball entry assist lottery, allowing the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

In addition to this, when the start opening opening/closing member 33c is in a closed state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b, and when the ball entry assist lottery is won, the start opening opening/closing member 33c is in an open state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

As described above, the first start winning section 33a is provided with a first start winning switch 224a that detects a game ball that has entered therein. Similarly, the second start winning section 33b is provided with a second start winning switch 224b that detects a game ball that has entered therein. Each of the start winning switches 224a, 224b constitutes a "start winning ball detection means" in this embodiment.

Then, as will be described in more detail later, when a game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, a lottery is held to determine whether the ball will be a "win" advantageous to the player or a "miss."

The "win" in the winning/losing lottery can be a "small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened, or a "big win" in which the large winning opening opening member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning/losing lottery is held based on the detection of a winning ball by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, a fluctuating display and a stationary display are displayed on the special display device 43 described below to inform the winner/loser of the result of the winning/losing lottery.

In this embodiment, when the first start winning switch 224a detects a winning ball and when the second start winning switch 224b detects a winning ball, a common winning lottery is performed and a variable display is displayed on the common special display device 43. However, a first special display device that displays a variable display to inform the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a and a second special display device that displays a variable display to inform the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b may be provided separately. The first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b may be the first or second trigger winning ball detection means. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display may be reserved and stored separately, and the corresponding variable display may be consumed in the order in which it was stored or in such a way that one has priority over the other. In addition, when this configuration is adopted, the allocation ratios of the types of jackpot states that are granted if the lottery is won may be different or the same.

In the game area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, a flow-down area is formed through which the game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down can pass through them one by one. The flow-down area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be the first flow-down route, which is the first route, and the flow-down area on the left side may be the second flow-down route, which is the second route. In addition, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the through gate switch 225 detects a game ball, a ball entry assist lottery is held to determine whether or not the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is opened. When the ball entry assist lottery is won, the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

At the top right of the game board 30, there are provided a through gate display device (normal symbol display device) 41 that displays the results of a ball entry assist lottery based on balls entering (ball passing) through the through gate 34, a special display device (special symbol display device) 43 that displays the results of a win/lose lottery based on balls entering each of the start winning sections 33a and 33b, and a special gate display device 44 that displays the results of an operation assist lottery based on balls entering (ball passing) through the special gate 650. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special gate display device 43 is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps.

The configuration of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be configured, for example, with a different number of lamp groups, or may be configured with different display devices such as a seven-segment display device, a dot display device, or a liquid crystal display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), a variable display (switching display) is started to inform the result of the winning/losing lottery, and when the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time, a mode corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery is displayed. The first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b may be the first or second trigger ball entry means. Furthermore, the display content of the special display device 43 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, so that the result of the winning/losing lottery is definitively displayed.

If a jackpot is won in this lottery, the large prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is switched from a closed state to an open state, and once the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of eight game balls have entered the variable prize winning device 32, one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached is considered one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to award a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "direct hit jackpot").

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the jackpot state (V entry jackpot) occurs not only when a "jackpot" is won in a winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering the start entry section 33 (first start entry section 33a or second start entry section 33b), but also when the game ball enters the first V entry passage 427 through the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special entry detection switch 461, or when the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 through the movable role 722 (second V entry passage 730) and is detected by the second special entry detection switch 738.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) during the variable display of the special display device 43, the variable display for that ball will be displayed after the variable display currently being performed has ended. In other words, the variable display of the special display device 43 will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of variable displays that can be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, a total of four variable displays are held in response to the game balls that have entered the first start winning section 33a and the second start winning section 33b.

The number of reserved times for the variable display of the special display device 43 is indicated by lighting a special display device reserved lamp 47 provided near the special display device 43. In this embodiment, the special display device reserved lamp 47 is composed of four lamps, and the number of reserved times is indicated by appropriately switching the state of each lamp on and off.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33 during a big win or small win, the corresponding change display is also reserved and is executed after the big win or small win state ends.

In the through gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a variable display (switching display) is started to display the result of the entry assist lottery, and when the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time, a mode corresponding to the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed. If the result of the entry assist lottery is a winning result corresponding to the opening of the start opening opening member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display device 41, the variable display is stopped, and then the start opening opening member 33c is opened. In addition, the display content of the through gate display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, so that the result of the entry assist lottery is definitively displayed.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 while the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, the change display for that portion will be displayed after the current change display has ended. In other words, the change display of the through gate display device 41 will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of times that the change display can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times are held, and the number of times that are held is displayed by lighting the through gate hold lamp 48 provided near the through gate display device 41. In this embodiment, the through gate hold lamp 48 is composed of four lamps, and the number of holds is indicated by appropriately switching the on/off state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) is started to display the result of the activation assist lottery, and when the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time, a mode corresponding to the result of the activation assist lottery is displayed. If the result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result that activates the movable device 722, the movable device 722 will be activated after a predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44 and the variable display is stopped. In addition, the display content of the special gate display device 44 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the activation assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Although more details will be given later, in this embodiment, even if a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the change in display (the result of the operation assist lottery) for that part is not withheld.

In addition, a performance display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37. The performance display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the performance display device 42, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43, and the content is displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is located in the center of the bottom of the game area (game board 30). The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big win occurs, the big winning opening opening member 32a is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state in which game balls can win into the big winning opening.

Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and since the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203".

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the central winning unit 37 from behind is provided on the rear of the game board 30 and protrudes rearward. In addition, a display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are removably attached to the rear side of the frame cover 213.

The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In addition, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the insides can be seen.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning section 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning means. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a specified trace is left behind. This makes it easy to discover whether the board box 263 has been tampered with.

The back frame set 215 is further provided with a first board relay board (not shown) which is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 etc. and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to the various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board is electrically connected to the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736), the second special ball entry detection switch 738, and the special gate switch 651. This second board relay board relays the various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector, just like the first board relay board.

In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect the entry of a ball into the start winning sections 33a and 33b, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

With the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are input to the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, a large prize opening solenoid that drives the large prize opening opening member 32a to open and close is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 by the variable prize winning device 32, and a start opening solenoid that drives the pair of start opening opening members 33c to open and close is provided in the second start winning section 33b. The back frame set 215 also has a third board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis that extends vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is provided with multiple external connection terminals for relaying various information transmissions to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., and is not labeled for convenience. For example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, time-saving mode, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91, 92 described below, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and terminals for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 is provided with an opening on the top side, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and further, a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also provided with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, which is journalled on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened to the rear. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage section 217, a discharge chute (not shown) is formed to discharge the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, game balls that win in each winning means such as the general winning section 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that do not win in any of the winning means are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate entities and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed integrally.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are removably attached to the rear side of the lower frame set 251 in a stacked manner.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a circuit board box 313a and fixed to the rear side of the lower frame set 251. For convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but in reality they are composed of a single board (printed circuit board).

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and is fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened remains.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside can be seen.

The payout control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returning to the normal state).

The power supply 313 is further provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, since the state before the power outage is stored and retained when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the game hall closes), if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed thereon that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or the like from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defensive performance. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launching device 60), and as shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be inserted and removed from the switch main body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward, and the inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces backward. When the detection unit is in a state where it protrudes from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is inserted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control device 261. In other words, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The main control device 261 constitutes the special game state granting means and opening/closing control means in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of CPU 501 and the return addresses of control programs executed by CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all data stored in the stack area, working area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

The backup area 503a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off (including the time of power off; the same applies below) so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was off when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on (including the power is turned on when the power is cleared; the same applies below). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described later) when the power is turned off due to a power outage or the like, and power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed when a power outage occurs.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the working area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, through gate display device 41, special display device 43, special gate display device 44, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41, special display device 43, and special gate display device 44 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the performance display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards, etc. are not shown in the illustration, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches that can constitute specified detection means, such as the general winning switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switches 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225, internal ball winning detection switch 437, special ball winning detection switches 461, 738, non-special ball winning detection switch 462, round ball winning detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651, as well as various electrical components such as various boards, a blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the blade member 404, a rotor motor 415 that rotates the rotor 414, a movable part solenoid 725 that moves the movable part 722 up and down, and a motor that swings the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminal sections (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections etc. form the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means comprises a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, a RAM 553 which is a memory which temporarily stores various data etc. when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and also various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory which temporarily stores work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 551.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, and is also connected to the display control device 45. In addition, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the performance button 125, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (e.g., a performance pattern command such as a variation pattern command) sent from the main control device 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not there is a win, and the performance display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays information in accordance with the display of the special display device 43.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores the control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a may be backed up, and data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off, so that when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, like the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SK1 is input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer in which commands sent from the main control device 261 are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls; a specific command to permit the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and the flag is turned on when the specific command is received, and turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before the power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout return command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the memory area. When commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the command is updated by returning to the beginning of the memory area. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a launch control device 312, a payout device 358, etc.

The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation section (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and to a card unit (ball lending unit) placed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and receives ball lending operation commands from the player and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, it is possible to omit the card unit connection board 314.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the launch device 60 is operated under the conditions that a launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the launch prohibition button 18a (see FIG. 1) that stops the launch is not operated, and game balls are launched at predetermined intervals with a strength according to the amount of operation of the handle 18. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to launch at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds (approximately 100 balls per minute).

The display control device 45 executes the display of the decorative patterns on the performance display device 42 according to instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input port 527 is connected to an input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. The input port 527 is also connected to the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 via the bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via the bus line 531, and the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and performs control of the VDP 526 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) by analyzing the received command or performing a predetermined calculation process based on the received command. This performs display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and the display content of the performance display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as designs to be displayed on the performance display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the performance display device 42. The VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, video RAM 524, etc., and mediates the reading and writing of data, and reads out display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a specified timing and displays it on the performance display device 42.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates a +12V power supply to drive various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supplies to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc. Note that the launch control unit 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V power supply, +5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control unit 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the power outage processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win/lose random number counter C1 is used in a win/lose lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win that opens the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening opening member 32a) or a small win that opens the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) based on the detection of the start winning switches 224a and 224b, a variable time selection counter C2 is used to determine the time (variable time) of the variable display performed on the special display device 43, an initial value random number counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the win/lose random number counter C1, a ball entry assist random number counter C3 is used in a ball entry assist lottery to determine whether or not to open the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) based on the detection of the through gate switch 225, and an operation assist random number counter C4 is used in an operation assist lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable role 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651.

Counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 is provided with a special variable reserve area as a reserve memory area in which the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area in which the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is stored. Both the special variable reserve area and the normal variable reserve area have one execution area and four reserve areas (reserved areas 1 to 4).

In addition, in each of the special variable hold areas, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game balls in the first and second start winning sections 33a and 33b. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total, as described above.

Furthermore, in each holding area of the normal variable holding area, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball through the through gate 34. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the through gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 399, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 399) as the closing value, it returns to 0, which is the lower limit as the opening value. Normally, when the win/no-win random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/no-win random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/no-win random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the win/no-win random number counter C1 is stored in the win/no-win random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (the timing when detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery, which is conducted based on the value of the winning/losing random number counter C1 stored in the special variable reserve area, produces one of the following lottery results: "small win," "big win," or "loss."

Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers that result in a "jackpot" is one, and the value is "0." In other words, there is a 1/400 probability of winning a "jackpot," and the special display device 43 displays a stop display in a manner corresponding to a "jackpot" (a combination of lit lamps), resulting in a 15-round jackpot state.

In addition, there are 398 random numbers that can be the "small prize", and the values are "2 to 399". In other words, the probability of winning the "small prize" is 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" in this embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, among the values of the win/loss random number counter C1, "2 to 21" corresponds to a "long small win", and "22 to 399" corresponds to a "short small win".

When a "short small win" is won, the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a "short small win", and the blade members 404 open for 0.5 seconds. When a "long small win" is won, the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a "long small win", and the blade members 404 open for 1.5 seconds. Here, the opening/closing pattern determination means in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 which executes the small win lottery and the big win lottery, and which determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing members such as the blade members 404.

In addition, the value of the win/lose random number counter C1, "1", corresponds to a "lose", and in the event of a "lose", the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) that corresponds to a "lose".

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 includes a win/lose determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win."

In addition, in this embodiment, after the big win state ends, a game state is provided in which the time (variation time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. This game state ends when the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43 even if the next big win state does not occur after the big win state ends, and then returns to the normal game state.

Hereinafter, the game state in which the change time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as the "time-shortened mode," and the normal game state in which the normal change display is performed without shortening the change time will be referred to as the "normal mode." The specific change times of the special display device 43 in the "time-shortened mode" and "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time-saving mode", the start opening opening/closing member 33c of the second start winning section 33b is opened relatively frequently, resulting in a "high ball entry state" in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b. As a result, in the "time-saving mode", it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b, compared to the "normal mode" in which the start opening opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened, resulting in a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

Specifically, in "normal mode", the through gate display device 41, which displays the results of the entry ball assist lottery that is held based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34, has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and the opening time of the start opening opening member 33c when the entry ball assist lottery is won is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in "time-shortened mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the start opening opening member 33c when the entry ball assist lottery is won is 2 seconds.

In other words, in the "time-saving mode," the through gate display device 41 fluctuates for a shorter time, and the start opening/closing member 33c is open for a longer time, compared to the "normal mode." Because the start opening/closing member 33c is open for a longer period of time, game balls enter the second start winning section 33b more frequently, winning/losing lotteries are held continuously, and ball holding is improved.

In this way, in the "time-saving mode," if the reserved variable display of the special display device 43 successively wins a small prize (although the flow of closing the vane members 404 once, performing the variable display, and then opening is the same, the variable time is shorter), the vane members 404 will be opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). This makes it easier to cause multiple game balls to enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 all at once.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or a "small win (short small win and long small win)" in the winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, as well as the opening time of the blade member 404 when a "small win (short small win and long small win)" occurs, are the same in both modes (time-saving mode and normal mode).

In addition, the probability of winning the ball entry assist lottery, which is conducted based on the passage of a game ball through the through gate 34, and the probability of winning the operation assist lottery, which is conducted based on the passage of a game ball through the special gate switch 651, are the same in all modes.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 9, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9), it returns to the lower limit, 0. The variable time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (when detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the variable time selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area of RAM 503.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "small win" in the win/lose lottery in "normal mode" is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds." The variation time selection table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the variation time selection counter C2 corresponds to a "2-second variation" or a "3-second variation" is stored in advance in the ROM 502.

In addition, when the lottery results in a "jackpot" or "loss" in "normal mode," the time the special display device 43 changes is "7 seconds."

On the other hand, the time that the special display device 43 changes in the "time-saving mode" is always set to "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the winning/losing lottery ("small win", "big win" or "miss").

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the size of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, and to use numbers that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The ball entry assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The ball entry assist random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34.

Normally, there are eight possible winning random number values, ranging from 1 to 8. When the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, the through gate display device 41 displays a varying value for a predetermined period of time, and then displays a stationary value in a manner (combination of lit lamps) that corresponds to a win or loss, and if a win occurs, the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) opens for a predetermined period of time.

The activation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19). The activation assist random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Normally, there are 15 random numbers that can be winning, ranging from 1 to 15. When the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, a fluctuating display is performed for a predetermined period of time on the special gate display device 44, and then a stationary display is performed in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a win or loss, and if a win occurs, the movable role 722 of the bypass mechanism 721 is in a protruding state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the activation assist lottery constitutes the activation lottery process in this embodiment, and the "lottery process execution means" and "state lottery means" are constituted by the functions of the main control device 261 that executes the activation assist lottery.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, here, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, the process of reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information is saved. If a game ball is paid out in response to the detection of a switch, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is incremented and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a detection signal has not been input, this process ends as it is. In the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. When this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter C1, the variable time selection counter C2, the goal assist random number counter C3, and the operation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "399", "9", "9", and "19", respectively), they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Then, in step S304, a start winning process is executed in response to a winning in the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), in step S305, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the game ball passing through the through gate 34, and in step S306, a ball counting process is executed in response to the ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

In the following step S307, special winning processing is executed in response to detection by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 (ball entering the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or detection by the second special ball entry detection switch 738 (ball entering the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730 of the movable device 722).

Furthermore, in step S308, non-special winning processing is executed in response to detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 (entry into the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414), and in step S309, special gate passing processing is executed in response to the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650.

Then, in step S310, the type-based ball entry process is executed in response to detection by the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (balls entered into the 15R ball entry port 731, the 7R ball entry port 732, and the 3R ball entry port 733), and the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start-up winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 13.

In addition, the execution area of the special variable pending area and each pending area are provided with a win/lose random number storage area that stores the value of the win/lose random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area that stores the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a start winning discrimination flag for determining whether the pending variable display is based on a ball entering either the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b.

In addition, in the special variable pending area in this embodiment, apart from the areas for storing the values of the hit/miss random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 described above, a big win occurrence flag indicating that a "big win" has been won in the win/miss lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, a miss flag indicating that a "miss" has been won, a long small win occurrence flag indicating that a "long small win" has been won, and a short small win occurrence flag indicating that a "short small win" has been won are provided. In addition, a 2-second variable flag, a 3-second variable flag, and a 7-second variable flag are provided to indicate the variable time in the special display device 43.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the value of the pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first and second start winning sections 33a and 33b, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the result of the negative determination in step S501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S501, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If the answer is no in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, where the reserved counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step S504, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above are stored in the first available reserved area in the special variable reserved area.

In step S505, the start winning discrimination flag of the reserved area in which the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on. In this embodiment, the start winning discrimination flag is set to on when the reserved variable display is based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33a, and is set to off when the held variable display is based on a ball entering the second start winning section 33b.

In the next step S506, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win." The win/loss determination process will be described in detail later.

In the next step S507, a change time determination process is performed to determine the change time in the special display device 43 based on the value of the change time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special change pending area. The change time determination process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S508, a setting process of the advance command is performed. The advance command includes information indicating whether the reserved variable information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the variable display) is based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b, information indicating a "small win" or "big win," information indicating the variable time, etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

Here, the details of the hit/miss determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. 14. Note that in this embodiment, the hit/miss determination process also determines the type of small hit (long small hit, short small hit).

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area matches "0", which is the value corresponding to a "jackpot". If the result of step S5101 is positive, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process is terminated.

If the result of step S5101 is negative, step S5103 determines whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable pending area is equal to "1", which is the value corresponding to a "lose". If the result of step S5103 is positive, i.e., if it is determined to be a "lose", the loss flag is turned on in step S5104, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5103 is negative, i.e., if it is determined to be a "small win", then in step S5105, it is determined whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to a "long small win". If the result of step S5105 is positive, then in step S5106, the long small win occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step S5105 is negative, i.e., if it is determined that a "short small win" has occurred, the short small win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the change time determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode is selected. If a positive determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1-second change flag, which indicates that the change time of the change display displayed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds, is set to ON, and then this process is terminated. In other words, in the time-saving mode, regardless of whether the result of the win/lose lottery is a big win, a long small win, a short small win, or a miss, the change time of the corresponding change display is always set to 0.1 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5201 is negative, then in step S5203, it is determined whether or not a long small win occurrence flag was set in the immediately preceding win/loss determination process. If the result of step S5203 is positive, i.e., if it is determined to be a "long small win," then in step S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either "0" or "1."

If the result of step S5204 is negative, i.e., if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is any of "2 to 9", then in step S5205, a 3-second variable flag is turned on, indicating that the variable time of the variable display displayed on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S5204 is positive, then in step S5206, a 2-second variable flag is turned on, indicating that the variable time of the variable display displayed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S5203 is negative, then in step S5207, it is determined whether the short small win occurrence flag is on. If the result of step S5207 is positive, i.e., if a "short small win" occurs, then in step S5208, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either "0" or "1."

If the answer is yes in step S5208, then in step S5205, a 3-second fluctuation flag is set to on, indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is no in step S5208, then in step S5206, a 2-second fluctuation flag is set to on, indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, and then this process ends. In other words, there is a higher possibility that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

If the result of step S5207 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," then in step S5209, the 7-second fluctuation flag, which indicates that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds, is turned on, and then the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after the processing of step S508, or if a negative judgment is made in step S502, in step S509, it is judged whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning section 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If a negative judgment is made in step S509, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made, in step S510, the pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the next step S511, the values of the win/loss random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored in the first available reserved area in the special variable reserved area. In step S512, a win/loss determination process is performed. Note that the win/loss determination process in step S512 is the same as the win/loss determination process in step S506 above, and a detailed description will be omitted.

In the next step S513, a variable time determination process is performed. Note that the correct/incorrect determination process in step S513 is similar to the variable time determination process in step S507 above, and a detailed description is omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a setting process for the preceding command is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If the result of step S601 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S601 is positive, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of holds in the variable display performed on the through gate display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S602 is positive, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, then the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Then, in the next step S604, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above is stored in the first free memory area of the normal variable reserve area of RAM 503. After that, the through-gate passing process is terminated.

Next, the ball entry count process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the entrance 601b of the introduction passage 601 has been detected, thereby determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7201 is affirmative, then in step S7202, a ball entry command is set to the sub-control device 262 to inform the sub-control device 262 that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 receives the ball entry command, it is configured to output a ball entry sound effect and turn on/flash a ball entry lamp (not shown) to notify the player that the ball has entered.

After that, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for determining the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by 1. In the following step S7204, a setting process for a monitoring timer that is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process is performed. In this embodiment, the monitoring timer is set to "10000" every time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected. Even if a predetermined value has already been set in the monitoring timer, it is overwritten with "10000". The monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in the normal process (the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 described later) that is performed every 4 mec. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information from the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7301 is positive, then in step S7302, the jackpot flag described below is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If the result of step S7302 is positive, then this process is terminated. In other words, during the jackpot state, even if a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, or if a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 through the movable role 722 (second V winning passage 730) and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate the corresponding jackpot state is not granted.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7302 is negative, then in step S7303, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag, indicating that the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 has detected a ball entry, is already on. If the result of step S7303 is positive, then this process ends. In other words, if it has already been decided that a jackpot state will be generated (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), then even if the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects a ball entry again, that jackpot will be invalidated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7303 is negative, the special prize flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the process ends.

In this embodiment, when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects a ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, but the type of jackpot state to be granted has not been determined. Therefore, the jackpot state is not initiated until the type is determined.

Similarly, when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects an entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, but the game ball has not yet entered the 15R ball entry port 731. Therefore, the jackpot state is not initiated until the game ball enters the 15R ball entry port 731 and a "15-round jackpot" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. 19. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball from the non-special winning ball detection switch 462. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game ball is discharged outside the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) via the out passage 428. If the determination in step S7401 is negative, this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7401 is positive, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the special gate passing process in step S309 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 20.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If the determination in step S7501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S7501, i.e., if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, then in step S7502, it is determined whether or not the third display flag described below is ON, i.e., whether or not a variable display is being performed on the special gate display device 44. If the answer is YES in step S7502, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7502 is negative, then in step S7503, it is determined whether or not a feature operation flag (described later) is on, i.e., whether or not the movable feature 722 is in operation (protruding state). If the result of step S7503 is positive, then this process is terminated.

As a result, even if a game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the operation assist lottery for that portion is invalidated, and no new right to operate the movable device 722 is granted.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7503 is negative, then in step S7504, the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in a predetermined actuation assist random number storage area set in RAM 503.

In the following step S7505, the special gate passing flag is turned on, and in step S7506, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then the process ends.

Next, the type winning ball processing in step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag is set to ON. If the result in step S7601 is negative, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7601 is positive, then in step S7602, it is determined whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7602 is positive, then in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag, which indicates a 15-round jackpot, is set to ON. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S7602 is negative, then in step S7605, it is determined whether or not the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7605 is positive, then in step S7606, the 7R jackpot flag, which indicates a 7-round jackpot, is set to ON. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S7605 is negative, then in step S7608 it is determined whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7608 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S7608 is positive, then in step S7609 the 3R jackpot flag is set to ON, indicating that this is a 3-round jackpot. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power outage occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12. The contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 9. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON) or not, and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 to clear (delete) the backup data. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the next step S104 to determine whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S111 as well. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the next step S106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. If the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S111 as well.

In the processing of step S111, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-control device 262 and the dispensing control device 311, which are the sub-side control devices. Then, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return to the initial state when you turn on the power, for example when the hall opens for business, you turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process moves to RAM 503 initialization processing (step S112, etc.). That is, in step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), the process at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of recovery from power failure) is executed, provided that the power failure occurrence information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored, and in step S108, the power failure occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command is sent to restore the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S110, the used registers are restored from the backup area 503a of RAM 503. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 10. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, external output processing is performed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings of the special display device 43 and the second start-up winning section 33b, etc., updated in the previous processing, and to transmit output data such as commands to each control device on the sub side.

For example, when starting a variable display on the performance display device 42, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the variable pattern command is a command signal that is output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the performance display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode of the performance display device 42 based on the command, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display that display mode on the performance display device 42.

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the performance display device 42, a confirmation command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In response to this, the sub-control device 262, which has input the confirmation command, issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display performance) being performed on the performance display device 42 based on the command.

However, in this embodiment, as described below, when the jackpot state is in progress, when the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, or when the central winning unit 37 is open (in a small winning state), the first display timer that measures the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is not decremented (see FIG. 23). Therefore, if the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects a ball entry during the fluctuation display of the special display device 43 (performance display device 42) and the special winning flag is turned on, a confirmation command will not be sent to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the special winning flag ends, and will be sent after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the next step S204, a V-winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a jackpot is set based on the game ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, entering the first V-winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and being detected by the first special ball-entry detection switch 461, or entering the bypass passage 737 via the movable role 722 (second V-winning passage 730) and being detected by the second special ball-entry detection switch 738. Details of this V-winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the type of display to be performed on the special display device 43 and the control contents of the special display device 43 are set, and hit determination and the performance pattern of the performance display device 42 are set. The details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32, i.e., what control is to be performed on the variable winning device 32, is set. As a result, when a big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening member 32a) is executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the blade member opening/closing process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. The blade member opening/closing process will be described in detail later.

In step S208, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the type of display to be performed on the through gate display device 41 and the control contents of the through gate display device 41 are set. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the start opening opening member 33c of the second start winning section 33b are set. The start winning section control process will be described in detail later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, the type of display to be performed on the special gate display device 44 and the control contents of the special gate display device 44 are set. Details of this third display control process will be described later. The display control means in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the third display control process.

In step S211, a role-playing device drive control process for the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this process, drive control process for the rotating body unit 410, drive control process for the bypass mechanism 721, drive control process for the type allocation mechanism 741, etc. are performed.

For example, in the drive control process for the rotating body unit 410, control is performed such as rotating the rotating body 414 in a counterclockwise direction at a constant speed, and in the drive control process for the type allocation mechanism 741, control is performed such as swinging the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm.

In addition, in the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721, when a predetermined condition is met, control is performed such as protruding the movable part 722. Details of the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (hereinafter referred to as the "bypass mechanism control process") will be described later.

In step S212, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to check whether or not a game ball is present in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. The remaining ball monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S213, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information has been set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power failure occurrence information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S214 whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, a positive determination is made in step S214, and the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the result of step S214 is negative, the process proceeds to step S215, where the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. After this process, the process proceeds to step S213. In other words, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing at the time of the determination in step S214, the random number initial value counter CINI is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing of the next execution of normal processing.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S212 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), the power is cut off, and the processing from step S216 onwards is performed as the power failure processing when the power is cut off. The power failure processing first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt processing in step S216, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S217, and stores the value of the stack pointer in the backup area 503a in step S218. Then, in step S219, a power failure notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step S220, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 503. Then, in step S221, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step S213 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to changes in the game state performed in steps S201 to S212, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of step S215 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle, and it can be stored easily. In addition, when returning to the state before the power interruption, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing burden of the main control device 261 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data at the time of the power interruption from being changed, and the state before the power interruption can be reliably stored.

Next, the V-winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag (see the special winning process in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the first special winning detection switch 461 or the second special winning detection switch 738 is on. If the determination in step S1501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1501 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1503, where it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, is set to on.

If the answer is YES in step S1503, then in step S1504, the round number counter for determining the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state is set to "15", and the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special winning flag is turned off, and the big win flag, which indicates that the big win state is occurring, is set to on. Then, in the following step S1506, the first variable flag, which indicates that the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 32 is being performed, is set to on, in step S1507, the first variable timer used to control the opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 is set to "7500", and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", after which the process ends.

If the result of step S1503 is negative, then in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the 7R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, is set to on. If the result of step S1509 is positive, then in step S1510, the round number counter is set to "7", and the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same process as described above is carried out.

If the result of step S1509 is negative, then in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, is set to on. If the result of step S1513 is negative, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S1513, the round number counter is set to "3" in step S1514, and then the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same process as above is performed.

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S801, the jackpot flag is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this process ends. In other words, during the jackpot state, no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

The jackpot state includes the period during the jackpot state (special game state), the opening period before the jackpot state starts, and the ending period after the jackpot state ends. In general, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display on the special display device 43 stops in a manner corresponding to a jackpot to when the first opening starts on the variable winning device 32), the performance display device 42 displays a message informing the user of the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (a predetermined period after the opening of the final round on the variable winning device 32 has ended), the performance display device 42 displays a message informing the user of the end of the jackpot state and the mode that will be assigned after the jackpot.

If the result of step S801 is negative, then in step S802 it is determined whether the special winning flag is on or not. The special winning flag is set to on when a game ball is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and is set to off when the jackpot flag is set to on (see step S1505 of the V-winning jackpot setting process). If the result of step S802 is positive, then this process is terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

On the other hand, if the result of step S802 is negative, then in step S803, it is determined whether the small win open flag is set to ON. The small win open flag is set to ON when the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, i.e., during a small win state, as will be described in detail later.

If the answer in step S803 is positive, the process ends. In other words, while the central winning unit 37 is open (during a small win state), no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

On the other hand, if the answer is negative in step S803, the setting status of the first display flag is checked in step S804 to determine whether or not a change is being displayed on the special display device 43. If the first display flag is set to on, it is considered that a change is being displayed, and if the first display flag is set to off, it is considered that a change is not being displayed. As will be described in more detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the change display on the special display device 43 starts (see step S808), and is turned off when the change display on the special display device 43 is stopped (see step S812).

If the result of step S804 is negative, that is, the game is not in a jackpot state, the right to a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is not open (in a small winning state), and the special display device 43 is not displaying a variable display, the game proceeds to step S805, where it is determined whether the value of the pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by a ball entering the start winning section 33, is greater than 0. If the result of step S805 is negative, that is, if no variable displays are stored in the pending state, the game ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S805 is positive, i.e., if at least one variable display is stored as pending, then in step S806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending counter Na.

In the next step S807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the special variable reserved area. This shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special variable reserved area to the execution area side in order, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. Note that in this shift process, not only the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, but also the on/off setting states of the jackpot occurrence flag, miss flag, long small win occurrence flag, short small win occurrence flag, 2-second variable flag, 3-second variable flag, and 7-second variable flag are shifted.

In the next step S808, the variable display setting process is performed. Details of the variable display setting process are now described with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the variable information corresponds to a "jackpot" by determining whether the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on. As a modified example, it is also possible to once again refer to the win/loss determination table in the same manner as in the win/loss determination process of the start winning process, and determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "0", which is a value corresponding to a jackpot.

If the result of step S901 is positive, i.e., if the player wins the "jackpot" in the win/lose lottery, then in step S902, a direct jackpot flag is set to ON, indicating that the player has won the "jackpot" in the win/lose lottery (a "direct jackpot"). After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area is set to ON.

If the result of step S903 is affirmative, then in step S904, a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S905, a value "1750" equivalent to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S903 is negative, then in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortened pattern) that shortens the variation time to result in a jackpot is determined, and a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S907, a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds, is set for the first display timer used to control the variation of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S901 is negative, then in step S908, the system determines whether or not the result is a "miss" by determining whether or not the miss flag in the execution area of the special variable pending area is set to on. As a variant, the system may determine whether or not the result is a "miss" by determining again whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1", in the same manner as the win/loss determination process of the start winning process.

If the result of step S908 is positive, i.e., if it is a "miss", then in step S909, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area is set to on. If the result of step S909 is positive, then in step S910, a fluctuation pattern that will result in a miss (miss fluctuation pattern) is determined, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also sent to the sub-control device 262. Then, in step S911, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the first display timer, and then the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S909 is negative, then in step S912, a variation pattern that shortens the variation time to result in a miss (miss shortening pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S913, a value "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds, is set for the first display timer used to control the variation of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S908 is negative, i.e., if it is a "small win", the wing open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether the long small win occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable pending area is on. As a variant, it may be determined whether or not a "long small win" has been won by determining again whether or not the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any of "2 to 21", in the same manner as the win/loss determination process of the start winning process.

If the result of step S915 is positive, i.e., if it is a "long small win", then in step S916, it is determined whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to ON. If the result of step S916 is positive, then in step S917, a fluctuation pattern (long small win 3-second fluctuation pattern) is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, the first display timer is set to a value of "750", which corresponds to three seconds. Furthermore, in step S919, the opening/closing control timer used to control the opening and closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750", which corresponds to three seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for three seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S916 is negative, then in step S920 it is determined whether the 2-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to on. If the result of step S920 is positive, then in step S921 a fluctuation pattern is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 2 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small win 2-second fluctuation pattern), and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S922, the first display timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to two seconds. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to two seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for two seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S920 is negative, then in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small win shortened pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a long small win is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S925, the first display timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in step S926, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. This results in the special display device 43 displaying a variable value for 0.1 seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S915 is negative, i.e., if it is a "short small win", then in step S927, it is determined whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to ON. If the result of step S927 is positive, then in step S928, a fluctuation pattern (3-second fluctuation pattern for a short small win) is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, the first display timer is set to a value of "750", which corresponds to three seconds. Furthermore, in step S930, the opening/closing control timer used to control the opening and closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750", which corresponds to three seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a three-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S927 is negative, then in step S931 it is determined whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to on. If the result of step S931 is positive, then in step S932 a fluctuation pattern is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 2-second fluctuation pattern), and further a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S933, the first display timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to two seconds. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to two seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for two seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S931 is negative, then in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small win shortening pattern) is determined that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a short small win, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S936, the first display timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in step S937, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for 0.1 seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag, which indicates that a variable display is being performed on the special display device 43, is set to ON. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if the result of step S804 is affirmative, i.e., if the display is changing, the process proceeds to step S809, where the first display timer decrement process is performed. In other words, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step S810, where the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the predetermined variable time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", step S810 is determined to be positive.

If the result of step S810 is negative, then in step S811, a switching display setting is made to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and this process ends. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process of the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 at the timing of the first display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S810, i.e., if the timing for stopping the variable display on the special display device 43 has arrived, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the next step S813, the special display device 43 is set to display a stop display. Based on the settings of this stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process of the next normal process. That is, if there is a "big win", the multiple lamps constituting the special display device 43 are displayed as stopped (e.g. lit for only a few seconds) in a manner (combination) corresponding to a "big win", if there is a "miss", the lamps are displayed as stopped in a manner corresponding to a "miss", if there is a "long small win", the lamps are displayed as stopped in a manner corresponding to a "long small win", and if there is a "short small win", the lamps are displayed as stopped in a manner corresponding to a "short small win".

Furthermore, in the stop display setting process in step S813, a setting process is performed to send a confirmation command to the sub-control device 262 to perform a stop display on the performance display device 42.

Then, in the following step S814, the discrimination information setting process is performed, and then the process ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit jackpot flag is set to ON. If the result of step S1001 is positive, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/lose lottery, the jackpot setting from step S1002 onwards is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not a jackpot state is being reached as a special game state is set to ON. In the following step S1003, a first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state is set to ON. In this embodiment, when the first variable flag is ON, the variable winning device 32 is set to an open state.

Next, in step S1004, a first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and indicates whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening, is set. In this example, a value of "7500", which corresponds to 30 seconds, is set for the first variable timer. This makes the maximum opening time per round (the longest time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter is set to indicate the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state occurs, i.e., the number of times the opening and closing process of the variable prize-winning device 32 is executed). Here, the value "15", which indicates the total number of rounds, is set to correspond to a "direct jackpot".

In the next step S1006, a winning counter is set to count the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls that can enter per round. This process then ends. During the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see step S301 in FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223. If it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one.

Also, if the result of step S1001 is negative, i.e., if the lottery determines that the player has not won the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation count counter is set. The fluctuation count counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-saving mode (high ball entry state). In this embodiment, the time-saving mode continues until the fluctuation display is performed four times on the special display device 43 after the end of the jackpot state, and the counter value is set to "4" after the end of the jackpot, as described below.

Here, if the counter value of the fluctuation counter is "0", this process ends. On the other hand, if the fluctuation counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the time-saving mode is in effect, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the counter value of the fluctuation counter is "0" or not. In other words, it is determined whether the current fluctuation display is the fourth fluctuation display since the end of the jackpot (after the time-saving mode is applied). If the value of the fluctuation counter is "0" here, in step S1010, the time-saving mode flag is turned off, and in step S1011, the normal mode flag is turned on, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation counter is not "0", this process ends as it is.

Next, the variable prize-winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S1201, the jackpot flag is checked to determine whether or not a jackpot is occurring. If the result is negative, the process ends.

If the result of step S1201 is affirmative, the count value of the first variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on.

If the result of step S1203 is affirmative, i.e., if the variable winning device 32 is open, the process proceeds to step S1204, where it is determined whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0." In other words, in step S1204, it is determined whether the open time of the variable winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If the result of step S1204 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1205, where it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 has reached the specified number per round (8 in this example). If the result of step S1205 is negative, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (the timing for the end of the round) has not yet arrived, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S1204 or step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, where it is determined whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0." In other words, it is determined whether the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been opened) has reached a specified number of times.

If the result of step S1206 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the process ends. The details of the process are described later.

If the result of step S1206 is negative, i.e., if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, then in step S1208, a round advance process is performed, and the process ends. In the round advance process, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1. In other words, the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeated until the number of rounds that have been performed reaches the specified number set in advance. In addition, in the round advance process, the first variable flag is turned off, and the first variable timer is set to the wait time (interval time) until the next round begins.

If the result of step S1203 is negative, i.e., if it is during an interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S1209, where it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If step S1209 returns a positive result, i.e., the interval period has ended and it is time to start the next round, then the round start process is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (in this example, "7500") is set in the first variable timer, and the maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, "8") is set in the winning counter. If step S1209 returns a negative result, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, then this process is terminated.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. If the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state. On the other hand, if the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state.

The end setting process of step S1207 will now be described with reference to FIG. 27. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot in progress flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time-saving mode flag is set to on. That is, in this embodiment, the time-saving mode is granted after the end of the jackpot state for all jackpot types, including the "direct jackpot" and the "V prize-winning jackpot ("15-round jackpot", "7-round jackpot", and "3-round jackpot").

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, the variation counter is set to "4" before proceeding to step S1306. In other words, after the big win ends, the time-saving mode is entered until the variation display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing is performed to turn off various big win flags. After step S1306, this processing ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process of step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is on. If the result of step S1801 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1801 is YES, then in step S1802, it is determined whether or not the small win open flag, which indicates that the blade members 404 are open, is ON. If the result of step S1802 is NO, that is, if the blade members 404 are about to open due to a "small win" win, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". As described above, if it is determined that a "small win" has been won during the variable display setting process, a value equivalent to the same time as the variable display variable time displayed on the special display device 43 is set for the opening/closing control timer (see steps S919, S923, S926, S930, S934, and S937). Therefore, at the same time as the corresponding variable display ends, this determination is also determined to be positive.

If the result of step S1803 is negative, the value of the open/close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S1803 is positive, i.e., the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, the small win open flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806.

Then, in step S1807, it is determined whether the long small win occurrence flag for the execution area of the special variable pending area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, the opening/closing control timer is set to a value of "375", which corresponds to 1.5 seconds, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1807 is negative, the opening/closing control timer is set to a value of "125", which corresponds to 0.5 seconds, in step S1809, and the process ends.

If the answer is YES in step S1802, then in step S1810, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". If the answer is NO in step S1810, then in step S1811, the value of the opening/closing control timer is decremented by 1, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1810 is positive, i.e., if the timing has come to close the blade member 404, then in step S1812, the small win open flag is turned off, in step S1813, the blade open flag is turned off, and in step S1814, the blade member 404 is closed, after which the process ends.

Next, the second display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2101, the setting status of the second display flag, which indicates whether or not the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, is checked to determine whether or not the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change (switching display). In more detail, if the second display flag is on, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, and if the second display flag is off, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is displaying a stopped state, which corresponds to a state in which the display of the change is stopped.

If the answer is negative in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0. If the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process ends.

Also, if the change is not being displayed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the normal change hold area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the normal change hold area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

After that, in step S2105, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display (switching display) on the through gate display device 41 have been met. In detail, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the through gate display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the time for the variable display on the through gate display device 41 varies between the time-saving mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the time-saving mode, the second display timer is set to a value of "125", which corresponds to 0.5 seconds, and in the normal mode, the second display timer is set to a value of "1250", which corresponds to 5 seconds. During the jackpot state, the second display timer is set to "1250", just like in the normal mode.

Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display (switching display) will start in the through gate display device 41.

If the result of step S2101 is affirmative, i.e., if the through gate display device 41 is displaying a variable value, the process proceeds to step S2106, where a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is subtracted by 1.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S2107, the second display in progress flag is turned off in step S2108, and a stop display setting is made in step S2109 to display a stop display on the through gate display device 41. Then, based on the contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process.

As mentioned above, whether or not a win has been made is determined based on the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variable reserve area. Specifically, the winning value is "1 to 8" out of the values 0 to 9 on the ball-entering assist random number counter C3.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2110, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stopped display corresponds to a win, setting processing is performed to open and close the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c). Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the opening time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for determining whether the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is in the open state or not.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) differs between the time-saving mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the time-saving mode, the second variable timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds, and in the normal mode, the second variable timer is set to a value of "100", which corresponds to 0.4 seconds. During the jackpot state, the second variable timer is set to "100", just like in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2107, a switching display setting is made in step S2111 to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41, and this process ends. Then, based on the contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41 at the timing of the second display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

Next, the start prize section control process in step S209 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 30.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag, which indicates whether the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is in the open state, is on. If it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning section 33b is in the closed state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2201 is affirmative, i.e., if the second variable flag is on, the second start winning section 33b is deemed to be in an open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is subtracted by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2203, where the value of the second variable timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified open time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0", step S2203 is judged as positive. If the judgment here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2203 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and the process ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, the second variable flag is turned off.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the second start winning section 33b in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the start opening opening member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b (start opening solenoid), and the second start winning section 33b is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the start opening opening member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b, and the second start winning section 33b is in a closed state.

Next, the third display control process of step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31.

First, in step S2301, the setting status of the third display flag, which indicates whether or not a changing display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, is checked to determine whether or not a changing display (switching display) is being performed by the special gate display device 44. In more detail, if the third display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, and if the third display flag is off, it is considered that a stopped display is being performed, which corresponds to a state in which the changing display is stopped on the special gate display device 44.

If the answer is negative in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302, where it is determined whether the special gate passing flag is on. If the answer is negative in step S2302, i.e., if the special gate passing flag is not on, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passing flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2303, where the special gate passing flag is turned off. In the following step S2304, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for variable display (switching display) in the special gate display device 44 have been met. In detail, the third display in progress flag is turned on, and a third display timer setting process is performed. The third display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed in the special gate display device 44, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is in time-saving mode or normal mode, the variable display time is uniformly set to 1 second, and the third display timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to 1 second.

Then, after step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display (switching display) will start on the special gate display device 44.

If the result of step S2301 is affirmative, i.e., if the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable value, the process proceeds to step S2306, where a third display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is subtracted by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2307, where it is determined whether the count value of the third display timer is "0", i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S2307, the third display in progress flag is turned off in step S2308, and a stop display setting is made in step S2309 to display a stop display on the special gate display device 44. Then, based on the contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process in the next normal process.

As mentioned above, whether or not a prize has been won is determined based on the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 stored in the activation assist random number storage area. Specifically, the winning value is "1 to 15" out of the values 0 to 19 on the activation assist random number counter C4.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2310, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stopped display corresponds to a win, setting processing is performed to perform drive processing of the movable role 722 of the bypass mechanism unit 721. Specifically, the role operation flag is turned on, and the operation time is set in the role operation timer.

The reel in operation flag is information used to determine whether the movable reel 722 is in operation.

The reel operation timer is a means for measuring the operation time (remaining time) of the movable reel 722, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of operation. In this embodiment, the reel operation timer is set to a value of "1000", which corresponds to 4 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2307, a switching display setting is made in step S2111 to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44, and this process ends. Then, based on the contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 at the timing of the third display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the reel drive control process in step S211 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the reel operation flag, which indicates whether the movable reel 722 is in operation, is on. If it is determined that the reel operation flag is not on (the movable reel 722 is in a stored state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the above step S2401 is answered in the affirmative, i.e., if the reel operation flag is on, the movable reel 722 is deemed to be in a protruding state, and the reel operation timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the reel operation timer is subtracted by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2403, where the value of the reel operation timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified protruding time has elapsed. Here, step S2403 is judged as positive when the specified protruding time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the reel operation timer becomes "0". If the judgment here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2403 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2404, where an end setting process is performed, and the process ends. In the end setting process of step S2404, the reel operation flag is turned off.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the reel operation flag, various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism 721 (movable reel solenoid 725) in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the reel operation flag is on, a drive signal is output to put the movable reel solenoid 725 into an excited state, and the movable reel 722 is in a protruding state. On the other hand, when the reel operation flag is off, a drive signal is output to put the movable reel solenoid 725 into a non-excited state, and the movable reel 722 is in a stored state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S7101, in order to identify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0" or not.

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by one based on the detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and decremented by one based on the detection of the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the special gate switch 651.

If the result of step S7101 is positive, i.e., if there are no game balls remaining in the internal area 401, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7101 is negative, then in step S7102, it is determined whether the value of a monitoring timer for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time a game ball entered the internal area 401 is "0."

If the result of step S7102 is negative, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and the process ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the internal area 401, the monitoring timer is set to "10000". Therefore, 40 seconds after the last ball enters the internal area 401, the monitoring timer becomes "0". In this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the internal area 401 to when it is discharged (specifically, the time from when the game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437 to when the game ball is detected by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or the special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7102 is positive, that is, if the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter does not become "0" even after a significant amount of time has passed since the game ball entered the internal area 401 and was released, it is assumed that a ball jam has occurred within the internal area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control such as turning on the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the release of game balls is performed. After that, this processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 34, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 35.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processes executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311 are put on hold for a while, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command reception flag is turned on to store that the command has been transmitted from the main control device 261, and this reception interrupt process is terminated. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated to store the next command received in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process of the command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it may be confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command may be stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 and the command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step S3101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in the following step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power failure occurrence information is set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 513 is saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 in step S3115 and subsequent steps.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information has been set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored in step S3109, the power failure occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. Also, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not power interruption information is set in the backup area 513a. If the power interruption information is set here, it means that the power has been cut off, and the process from step S3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. In the power outage processing, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, a command judgment process to be described later is executed. Then, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, in step S3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 513a, and in step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step S3122 checks for information on the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage can be made easier. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so that recovery can be made easily, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 36. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first in step S3201, a command is obtained from the main control unit 261 and a judgment process is performed on that command.

Here, the command determination process of step S3201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step S3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed the initialization of RAM 513 when the power was turned on, so in step S3308 the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3309 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3311 the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 performs initialization processing of RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command, so the timing at which RAM 503 and the timing at which RAM 513 are initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as the RAM 513 being initialized and being unable to perform control corresponding to the received command. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step S3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM 513 and initializing RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed with the payout permission flag on, a disadvantage such as not being paid out when there are remaining winning balls occurs, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM 513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Also, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to permit the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information of a power outage and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area, and stores it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command sent from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. In addition, when a prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the payout of prize balls can be performed early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let us return to the flowchart in Figure 36 for further explanation. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process is terminated. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3202 is positive, then in step S3203, permission to launch is set for the launch control device 312, and in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation should be started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returned to normal).

After that, in step S3205, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full but not yet set in response to a change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full but not yet set in response to a change in the state of the lower tray. Also, in step S3206, the tank ball no-ball state (bulb out state) or the tank ball no-ball not yet set state (bulb present state) is set based on a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball no-ball state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no-ball switch, and when the tank ball is no longer present, the tank ball no-ball state is set, and when the tank ball is no longer present, the tank ball no-ball state is set.

Then, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, the condition is notified.

Next, the payout control process for the prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is executed in step S3208, the motor control status acquisition process is executed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is executed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the command sent from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step S3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is configured as a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the memory area, and when commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the memory area is returned to the beginning and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

In the next step S3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the variable information included in the advance command in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553. The advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering either the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (setting of the start winning discrimination flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a big win (setting of the big win occurrence flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a long small win or a short small win (setting of the long small win occurrence flag or the short small win occurrence flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a miss (setting of the miss flag), and information indicating the variable display time (setting of the 2-second variable flag, the 3-second variable flag, the 7-second variable flag, or the 0.1-second variable flag).

The pending information storage area also has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4) and one execution area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main control unit 261. The pending information storage area stores the variable information contained in the preceding command in chronological order according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the variable information stored in the special variable pending area of the main control unit 261 can also be grasped by the sub-control unit 262.

Here, the pending information storage process in step S3903 will be explained with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, a pending counter Np that counts the number of pending variable information items stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1.

In the next step S4103, the variable information, including information on whether or not the initial command is a big win, information on whether or not the initial command is a small win, information on the variable time, etc., is stored in the first available reserved area in the reserved information storage area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the content of the performance display are obtained, and the values are stored in the same reserved area in which the variable information was stored.

After performing the processing of step S4104, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, where it is judged whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive judgment is made in step S4105, the value of the pending counter Np is decremented by 1 in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the pending information storage area. This data shift process is a process in which the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the pending information storage area is shifted sequentially to the execution area, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → first pending area, third pending area → second pending area, fourth pending area → third pending area, and so on.

After performing the processing of step S4107, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4105, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, where it is judged whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3911.

In step S3905, update processing is performed on various counters used when determining the performance display content. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, various calculation processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and setting the output of the command are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 when a variation pattern command is received. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the performance display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various types of performances (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

The display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during a big win, and the display command required each time is generated based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. Normally, the display command related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 is roughly divided into a normal variable data group and a reach performance data group, and basically, the data constituting these data groups are output in sequence in accordance with a time order predetermined based on the above-mentioned variable time timer, thereby performing display performance according to various variable patterns. For example, if the normal variable data group is normal variable data 1, normal variable data 2, ..., normal variable data m, and the reach performance data group is reach performance data 1, reach performance data 2, ..., reach performance data n, data output is performed in the order of normal variable data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal variation, and then data output is performed in the order of reach performance data 1 → 2 → ... → n with the start of reach performance.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and starts displaying changes on the performance display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the performance display continues in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until a confirmation command is received. Then, when a confirmation command is received, the display of changes on the performance display device 42 is stopped.

In addition, in step S3906, the presence or absence of operation of the effect button 125 is also confirmed, and if operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the change count counter is set to "4" in the end setting process, or if the value of the change count counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command to that effect is output from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, if the sub-controller 262 receives an activation notice command output from the main controller 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, an activation notice display may be performed to warn that it is a super hot time when the movable device 722 will be activated.

For example, the device may notify the player of the number of seconds remaining until the movable device 722 is activated, or may notify the player of the timing at which the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603, thereby ensuring that the movable device 722 will be activated at a better timing.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamps and decorations is set to synchronize with the performance performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display performance performed by the performance display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set to synchronize with the effects performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effects performed by the effect display device 42. In addition, when audio-related commands, such as an error notification, are sent from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, control settings for the customer waiting performance (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed while the performance display device 42 is not performing a display performance corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43) and other processing are performed.

In step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, when causing the performance display device 42 to perform a display performance corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After steps S3905 to S3910 are executed every 1 msec, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3911, where it is judged whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 553. The information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control device 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step S3912, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step S3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process is put into an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step S3913. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring and each output port is turned off. In addition, the stored information on the power failure occurrence is erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing is looped infinitely.

As described above in detail, according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched into the game area enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) and a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the game area, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball entry opening 403 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is open, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 is guided to the drop passage 602 via the introduction passage 601.

The ball that falls through the drop passage 602 is directed by a route allocation member 603 to a normal guide passage 604 that can lead to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or a special guide passage 605 that can lead to the special device operation lottery area 409.

However, under normal circumstances, the route allocation member 603 is inclined to the right and the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, so that the game balls falling down the fall passage 602 are guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

When the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, the route allocation member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined time due to the force it receives from the game ball that comes into contact with it. Therefore, if a game ball falls down the fall passage 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide passage 605.

The game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 is guided to the win/lose lottery area 407, and its destination is allocated by the rotor unit 410 (rotor 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted.

Then, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408, where the type of jackpot is determined. After the type of jackpot (number of rounds) is determined, the jackpot state begins.

Meanwhile, the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 is guided to the accessory activation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650. Then, when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an activation assist lottery is held, and if the activation assist lottery is won, the movable accessory 722 is activated for a predetermined period of time.

When the movable part 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are connected via the second V winning passage 730 inside the movable part 722.

When a game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable device 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737, and when the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted.

Then, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot begins.

In other words, when the movable device 722 is in an operating state (protruding state), the game ball that is guided to the normal guide passage 604 is guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731 without passing through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism 741.

The main effects of this embodiment are described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable role 722 in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401. In particular, in this embodiment, by activating the movable role 722, it is possible to perform a game presentation that increases the expectation of the occurrence of a V-winning jackpot. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722, and the movable role 722 is configured to be activated if the activation assist lottery is won.

As a result, the movable part 722 does not move constantly, either periodically or continuously, and does not operate every time the special gate switch 651 detects a ball entering the jackpot. This prevents the presentation related to the movable part 722 from becoming monotonous, and increases the player's anticipation of the operation of the movable part 722.

In addition, by providing the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 with a trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) that detects the operation trigger of the movable role 722, whether or not the movable role 722 will be in an advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further increasing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401 and cannot flow down (cannot enter) the first V winning passage 427, etc. If the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 is configured to flow down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable role 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable role 722 will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine will be easily committed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable role 722. In addition, there is a risk that it will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc. through the normal guide passage 604 without passing through the special gate 650. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 and the game ball that the movable device 722 acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various problems mentioned above can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a route allocation member 603 is provided that allocates the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 to either a normal guide passage 604 that can guide the ball to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or a special guide passage 605 that can guide the ball to the role activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650).

For example, when two game balls successively enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, and the second game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605. As a result, when two game balls successively enter the internal area 401, it is possible to direct the game balls to both the normal guide passage 604 and the special guide passage 605, respectively, thereby making the effect of the movable device 722 more effective.

However, in this embodiment, the launching device 60 is configured to launch game balls at 0.6 second intervals, and the wing members 404 of the central winning unit 37 are opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win", and for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win". This makes it difficult for situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple game balls landing in succession on the central winning unit 37 during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing members 404) is open, to occur frequently.

Under such a configuration, if multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open period of the blade member 404), the movable device 722 acts (assists) to increase the probability that the game ball will not enter the V, and there is a risk that the player's expectations will fade and interest will decrease when multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 consecutively at the same time.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the time period during which the display changes (the time from when a specific game ball passes through the special gate 650 until the movable device 722 starts to operate) displayed on the special gate display device 44 is set to "1 second," and the operating time of the movable device 722 after it starts to operate is set to "4 seconds."

As a result, even if, for example, other game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650, or other game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650 do not enter the V, game balls that subsequently enter the central winning unit 37 will be given a higher chance of entering the V.

In other words, game balls other than the game ball that entered the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball that passed through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open period of the blade member 404) are given a chance to win a V with a higher probability.

More specifically, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the entrance portion 601b as the specific area) flows down the normal guide passage 604, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the entrance portion 601b) flows down the special guide passage 605, and then the game ball that flows down the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 is activated, in the normal When the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 604 passes through the movable device 722, the movable device 722 has not yet been activated, and the game ball that has flowed down the normal guide passage 604 is not acted on (assisted by) the movable device 722 and does not win the V prize. Even if this is the case, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 during the next open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) (the game ball that passes through the entrance 601 after the next time) will flow down the normal guide passage 604, and the action of the movable device 722 will provide a chance to win the V prize.

Of course, instead of the above configuration, various set times such as the time it takes for the variable display performed by the special gate display device 44 to change (the time until the movable device 722 starts to operate) and the operation time of the movable device 722 after it starts to operate can be set to times different from the above set times, and after a certain game ball passes through the special gate 650, after a relatively long period of time (for example, after one minute or more), the game ball that enters the internal area 401 flows down into the normal guide passage 604, and the action of the movable device 722 provides a chance to win a V prize.

This configuration allows the player to actively play the game, trying to get the game ball to enter the central winning unit 37, even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the above-described embodiments in any combination of all or part. It is also possible to combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine that combines the functions of a gaming machine (so-called old type 1 pachinko machine) in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes to create a jackpot state (direct jackpot) when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and the functions of a gaming machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a central winning unit 37 opens and closes when a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and a gaming ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427, etc., to create a jackpot state (V winning jackpot).

It is not limited to this, and may be implemented as other types of pachinko machines. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball machines.

For example, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33, a predetermined lottery process is not performed (or a lottery process with a 100% probability of winning may be performed), and the central winning unit 37 opens based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427 or the like, creating a jackpot state (a type of game machine known as the old type 2 pachinko machine).

In addition, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot state occurs in which the central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means opens and closes. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. In other words, in a gaming machine of the type in which a jackpot state occurs in which a specified variable ball entry means (a large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering a specified starting ball entry means, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b constituting the specific area, and a game ball that enters the right ball entry opening 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b constituting the specific area, and a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437 constituting the specific detection means. However, various configurations related to the specific area and the specific detection means, such as the position and number at which the specific area and the specific detection means are provided, are not limited to the configuration related to the entrance 601b and the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, one or more specific areas and specific detection means may be provided at a position different from the left and right entrances 601b, such as a configuration in which one exit 601a of the introduction passage 601 is set as a specific area and the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is placed there as the specific detection means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403, etc. (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601, and the pair of left and right inlets 601b) may be omitted. For example, the left ball entry opening 403, etc. (including the left blade member 404, the left part of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet part 601b on the left side) may be omitted, and only the right ball entry opening 403, etc. (including the right blade member 404, the right part of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet part 601b on the right side) may be provided. This results in a configuration in which a ball passage (the right part of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and which can guide the game balls one by one to the outlet part 601a, which is a specific area provided only at one location, is provided only at one location. In other words, the game balls that do not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the internal area 401 by passing through the outlet part 601a. In addition, the ball passage (the right side of the lead-in passage 601) is located in a position where only game balls that are shot with a certain strength (right-handed hit) and fly over the central winning unit 37 can pass through.

Alternatively or in addition to this, a ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) capable of guiding game balls one by one to the ball entrance opening 403 on one side (including the blade member 404 on one side, one side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on one side) may be provided at an outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37 (for example, the right side).

In addition, in a specific area such as the outlet 601a or inlet 601b of the introduction passage 601, the passage may be configured to allow the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction (towards the internal area 401), while being provided with a restricting means (such as a valve-shaped member that changes state from a first state to a second state depending on the force received from the game ball) that restricts the game ball from passing in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction.

The probability of winning in various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (such as lottery processing using software or lotteries using mechanical mechanisms) is set appropriately for each model, and any value can be used. It goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

It may also be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which the gaming balls are circulated within the gaming machine and not directly paid out to the player, i.e. a so-called sealed-in type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have a different configuration.

For example, in the above embodiment, the types of jackpot states are set as a "3-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "15-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 15 times, but the invention is not limited to these and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states.

(c) The configuration of the game mode granted after the end of the jackpot state (such as the granting period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time-saving mode is applied in which the time (changing time) of the changing display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the changing display is performed four times on the special display device 43, but the period during which the time-saving mode is applied is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving mode may be configured to continue after the end of the jackpot state until the next jackpot state occurs.

In addition, as a gaming mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the time-saving mode, a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot state (direct jackpot) is increased may be provided. Of course, the gaming machine may be configured so that the time-saving mode or high-probability mode is not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the ball entry assist lottery, which is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the through gate 34, and the probability of winning the operation assist lottery, which is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the special gate switch 651, are configured to be the same in either mode.

In addition to this, the game mode after the end of the big win state may be a mode in which the probability of winning the ball entry assist lottery, the probability of winning the operation assist lottery, the probability of winning a small win (especially a long small win), etc. is higher than in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to the time-saving mode or the high probability mode.

(d) The configuration related to the device activation lottery (device activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the device activation lottery area 409, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable device 722. If the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated.

In addition to this, for example, the configuration may be such that, without performing a lottery process, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, the activation condition is always met and the movable device 722 is activated.

It may also be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the count value reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, an operating condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated. It may also be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the count value reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and an operating condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery that determines whether or not to activate the movable role 722 may be performed not by software lottery processing, but by providing a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a crown in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 and performing the lottery based on the behavior of the game ball. However, performing the lottery processing by software is preferable in terms of simplifying the configuration of the central winning unit 37.

For example, in the role activation lottery area 409, instead of the game ball always passing through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), the game ball may pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate (or not).

(d-3) In addition, in the above embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the operation trigger of the movable part 722 is configured to be provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, but the location at which the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this and may be a different location.

For example, the central winning unit 37 may be configured to have a second internal area (an area where balls can enter from an entrance portion different from the ball entry opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404) different from the internal area 401, and a trigger ball entry means (special gate) may be provided in the second internal area.

(d-4) Also, like the through gate 34, a trigger ball entry means (special gate) may be provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter (pass through). The configuration related to the trigger ball entry means is not limited to a through gate or other ball entry means through which an entering game ball can pass, but may be a ball entry means such as a winning port through which an entering game ball is discharged outside the game area. Then, a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined winning port, and the movable device 722 may be configured to operate when a predetermined operating condition is met, such as when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained.

In addition, a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 may pass through the special gate 650, be detected by the special gate switch 651, and then return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, rather than being ejected to the back side of the game board 30.

In addition, a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 may pass through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by a specified ball detection means, return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and then enter a trigger ball entry means (such as a special gate) provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, where it may be detected by a trigger ball entry detection means (such as a special gate switch).

However, if the trigger ball entry means (special gate) that detects the activation trigger of the movable gimmick 722 is located outside the central winning unit 37, there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means (special gate switch) to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to be committed by activating the movable gimmick 722. From this perspective, it is more preferable that the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is located within the central winning unit 37.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display starts on the special gate display device 44, and after a predetermined time, a stationary display is made in a manner corresponding to the result of the activation assist lottery, and if the result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result, the movable device 722 is then configured to operate.

Not limited to this, the display means for displaying the results of the activation assist lottery (special gate display device 44) may be omitted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the change time of the change display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may include multiple change patterns with different change display times.

For example, the main control device 261 may be configured to include a fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times, and a fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a gaming ball by the special gate switch 651, and to control the special gate display device 44 based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means.

This allows the time from when the special gate display device 44 starts to display the change to when it stops to be variable. In turn, it allows the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 to when the movable device 722 actually goes into an operating state (advantageous state) to be variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, even if a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the change display (the result of the activation assist lottery) for that part is not withheld. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that part is invalidated, and the right to activate the movable device 722 is not newly granted.

In addition to this, the configuration may include a holding means capable of holding a predetermined number of changing displays (operation assist lottery results) when a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying changes or while the movable device 722 is in operation.

(e) The configuration related to route allocation (route allocation area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route allocation member 603 in the above embodiment is supported so as to be swingable, and is normally maintained in a right-inclined state by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown), so that a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 can flow down to the left-side normal guide passage 604. In this state, when a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 is guided to the left-side normal guide passage 604, the route allocation member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614, and is configured to be in a left-inclined state for a predetermined time, so that a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 can flow down to the right-side special guide passage 605.

The configuration of the route allocation means (shape, operation mode, etc.) is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, an axle pin 610 is fixed to the axle 611 of the route allocation member 603, the axle 611 protruding toward the rear side of the upper rear wall 400a, and further, as shown in FIG. 46, an action piece 800 is formed extending downward from the rear end of the protruding axle pin 610, and a pair of coil springs 801, 802 are provided as a maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from the left and right, so that the route allocation member 603 is normally configured to maintain a balanced state (reference posture) with no left-right tilt in the center position of the central piece 613 (position of the axle pin 610)

By configuring it in this way, when a game ball falls onto the route allocation member 603, which is normally in a balanced state, it is not clear whether the game ball will be guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side or the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

When a game ball that has fallen onto the route allocation member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided, for example, to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the route allocation member 603 rotates once in a clockwise direction due to the force of the game ball contacting the right piece 615, and enters a right-inclined state (first position) [see FIG. 41(a)], and then rotates counterclockwise due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, and enters a left-inclined state (second position) [see FIG. 41(b)]. After that, the route allocation member 603 swings left and right multiple times, and then returns to an equilibrium state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, such that it enters a right-inclined state again.

Similarly, when a game ball that has fallen onto the route allocation member 603 in a balanced state is guided, for example, to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, the route allocation member 603 rotates once counterclockwise due to the force of the game ball contacting the left piece 614, becoming inclined to the left, and then rotates clockwise due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, becoming inclined to the right. After that, the route allocation member 603 swings left and right multiple times, becoming inclined to the left again, and then returns to a balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802.

In this configuration, when two game balls fall consecutively onto the route allocation member 603 in an equilibrium state, if the first leading game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left, the second following game ball will be guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right. Conversely, if the first leading game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right, the second following game ball will be guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left.

The above configuration does not require a driving means for driving the route sorting member 603, and while adopting a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which multiple game balls that fall continuously are sorted alternately into different routes. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration and control, and to make the device more compact.

(e-2) In the route allocation member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, a weight may be attached to the lower end of the action piece 800, so that the route allocation member 603 is normally kept in a balanced state, but can be freely swung by the action of the game ball.

(e-3) In the route allocation member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, a drive means (allocation drive means) such as a motor that swings the route allocation member 603 may be provided, so that the route allocation member 603 swings periodically or continuously between a right-tilted state and a left-tilted state. In addition, the route allocation means such as the route allocation member 603 may be normally in a stopped state, and may be in a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is met and a specific state is reached.

(e-4) The route allocation means does not have to be movable, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or may be integral with it. In other words, the route may be allocated based on the random behavior of the game ball. In addition, the position and number of the route allocation means and other various configurations related to the route allocation means are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, one or more route allocation means may be provided in a position different from that of the above embodiment (another variable ball entry means different from the central winning unit 37).

(f) The configuration of various guidance routes is not limited to the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the time from when the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) and the movable device 722 is in an advantageous state is shorter than the movable body arrival time from when the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the movable device 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604).

If the time required for the game ball to reach the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 to reach an advantageous state is longer from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 to the movable device 722 (the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604) than the time required for the game ball to reach the movable device 722 (the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604), when two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable device 722 before the movable device 722 operates, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

In addition, in order to lengthen the time it takes for the game ball guided into the normal guide passage 604 to reach the movable device 722, it is possible to, for example, lengthen the distance the game ball needs to travel to pass through the normal guide passage 604. Alternatively or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the normal guide passage 604.

Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane that causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit in the same place several times before moving on, or a rib or the like that stops the momentum of the game ball and allows it to move on over time.

(f-2) For example, in the above embodiment, only one special guide passage 605 is provided to guide the game ball to the special gate 650 as a second route (trigger ball entry guide route) that guides the game ball sorted by the route sorting member 603 to the trigger ball entry means (special gate). However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may include multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes) that differ in the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means (special gate) from the route sorting member 603.

By providing multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes), the period from the time when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation member 603 (predetermined trigger) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an operating state (advantageous state) can be varied.

In addition, with the above configuration, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means (special gate) can be varied by a mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further increasing the interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in Figure 47, the configuration may include a first second route (first special guide passage 605A) in which the time it takes for the game ball to reach an advantageous state from the time the game ball is guided by the route distribution member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the first trigger ball entry means (first special gate 650A) and the movable device 722 becomes activated is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the game ball is guided by the route distribution member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the movable device 722 (exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604), and a second second route (second special guide passage 605B) in which the time it takes for the game ball to reach an advantageous state from the time the game ball is guided by the route distribution member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the movable device 722 becomes activated is shorter. Here, the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" constitutes the "first downflow route," and the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" constitutes the "second downflow route" (and so on).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, a first special gate switch 651A is provided in the first special gate 650A to detect a game ball passing through it, and a second special gate switch 651B is provided in the second special gate 650B to detect a game ball passing through it. Here, the "first special gate switch 651A" constitutes the "first trigger ball entry detection means," and the "second special gate switch 651B" constitutes the "second trigger ball entry detection means" (same below).

The passage width of each of the special guide passages 605A, 605B and the special gates 650A, 650B is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, game balls that pass through each of the special gates 650A, 650B are discharged outside the internal area 401 via a discharge passage (not shown).

In addition, a slide member 655 capable of opening and closing the entrance is provided at the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction. When it is displaced to a forward protruding position, it is in a closed state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and when it is displaced to a rearward retracted position, it is in an open state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is open.

When the slide member 655 is in a closed state, the game balls sorted by the route sorting member 603, which serves as an upstream route sorting means, pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and are guided to the first special guide passage 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in an open state, the game balls sorted by the route sorting member 603 are guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

The sliding member 655 may be configured to constantly repeat the sliding movement, or the state of the sliding member 655 may be changed periodically or randomly. In addition, the sliding member 655 may be controlled so that the proportion of the sliding member 655 that is in the open state and the proportion of the sliding member 655 that is in the closed state differ in a particular state.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) in this embodiment, and can change the destination of the game ball to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)." In addition, the route allocation means such as the route allocation member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655.

When a game ball is detected by each of the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722. If the activation assist lottery is won, the movable role 722 is activated for a predetermined period of time. Note that the probability of winning the activation assist lottery may be different when the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A in a specific state from when the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. In other words, the probability that the movable role 722 can be in a predetermined activation state may be different when the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)".

In the example shown in FIG. 47, ribs 653A and 653B are provided on the first special guide passage 605A, which is the path along which the game ball moves, to lengthen the path length of the first special guide passage 605A, and the game ball's momentum is stopped so that it moves forward over time.

In addition to or in place of the ribs 653A and 653B, other delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage or a crane, a mechanism that makes the game ball go back and forth or go around the same place several times before moving forward) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A, 650B (special gate switches 651A, 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B, but instead, a game ball passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B may move toward one special gate (special gate switch) and be detected by the same special gate switch.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 47, if the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball will always pass through the first special gate 650A (first special gate switch 651A), and if the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball will always pass through the second special gate 650B (second special gate switch 651B). However, without being limited to this, the game ball may be configured to pass (or not pass) through the first special gate 650A or the second special gate 650B as the trigger ball entry means at a predetermined rate. In addition, the proportion of game balls that can pass through the trigger ball entry means (the proportion of movable device 722 that can be in a specified operating state) may be different when the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)."

(f-3) A configuration with multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above will be more effective under the configuration related to the route allocation member 603 exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above.

If the time required for the game ball to reach the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 to be in an advantageous state is longer from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 to the time the game ball reaches the movable device 722, when the route allocation member 603 guides the game ball to the special guide passage 605, the time required for the game ball to reach the movable device 722 to be in an advantageous state, if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable device 722 before the movable device 722 is activated, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball is directed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 and the second game ball is directed to the normal guide passage 604, the likelihood of a jackpot occurring increases, and the player will watch with anticipation the behavior of the game ball that has been guided to the special guide passage 605.

On the other hand, if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable role 722 from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 is shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the movable role 722 from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the special guide passage 605 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 and the movable role 722 is in an advantageous state, if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604, it will be clear that the game ball will reach the movable role 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable role 722 ends, unless the movable role 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, and this may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball is directed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603 and the second game ball is directed to the special guide passage 605, the likelihood of a jackpot occurring increases, and the player will watch with anticipation the behavior of the game ball that has been guided to the special guide passage 605.

Therefore, if the configuration has multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes) as described above, even if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the normal guide path 604 or the special guide path 605, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route (first special guide path 605A) with a long time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route (second special guide path 605B) with a short time to reach the advantageous state." This leaves the possibility that the timing at which the movable device 722 operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable device 722 will match, so the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

(g) The configuration related to the winning/losing lottery (winning/losing lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a rotor unit 410 (rotor 414) is provided as a win/lose allocation means. The rotor 414 has one special pocket 416a for a jackpot and two non-special pockets 416b for losses, and rotates at a constant speed in a counterclockwise direction.

For example, the number and ratio of pockets 416a and non-special pockets 416b on the rotating body 414 may be changed to change the probability of winning the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In addition, the rotating body 414 may be configured to have, for example, a special pocket section 416a for a 3R jackpot and a special pocket section 416a for a 7R jackpot, and a jackpot type lottery may also be conducted in the win/lose lottery area 407. In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(g-3) Instead of the rotating body 414, the configuration may include another winning/losing lottery mechanism, such as a crown.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) The type-based lottery area 408 is provided with a type-based allocation mechanism 741 as a type-based allocation means (type-based determination means) that allocates the destination of game balls to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733.

Instead of the type-sorting mechanism 741, the device may be configured with another type-selection mechanism, such as a crane.

(h-2) The type selection area 408 may be omitted, and the type of jackpot state to be awarded may be determined when a gaming ball enters a special ball entry means such as the first V winning passage 427. In other words, the type determination that determines the type of jackpot state may be performed by software-based determination processing.

(i) The configuration of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the route allocation area 406 (route allocation member 603) and the device activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) may be omitted. In such a case, for example, when a ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, an activation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to activate the movable device 722.

However, if the movable part 722 is simply configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the ball entry detection by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the movable part 722 will operate at the same timing every time a game ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

Therefore, in such cases, it is preferable to also employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration described above that makes the fluctuation time variable.

(j) The configuration (position, shape, operation mode, advantageous state, etc.) of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is not limited to the configuration related to the movable device 722 in the above embodiment, and other configurations such as an opening and closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable device 722 according to the above embodiment is configured to be in an operating state (advantageous state) so as to avoid the winning/losing lottery performed by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery performed by the type allocation mechanism 741, and to guide the game ball that is normally guided to the guide passage 604 directly to the 15R ball entrance 731.

In other words, when the movable part 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is configured to make it easier to get a V-winning jackpot than when the movable part 722 is in an inoperable state (non-advantageous state), and it is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the 15R ball entrance 731, which corresponds to the 15R jackpot that is the most advantageous to the player out of the multiple types of special game states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot).

In addition to this, the configuration may be such that the game ball is guided to the entrance of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding the win/lose lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted.

(j-2) Also, a movable body may be provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the movable body changes state to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type allocation mechanism 741 may be avoided, and the game ball may be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731.

(j-3) The rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414, which normally rotates at a constant speed, may change to an advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for the jackpot may stop temporarily at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435, or the special pocket portion 416a for the jackpot may move at a very slow speed through a position corresponding to the gate portion 435.

(j-4) The rotor 414 may be configured to have, for example, a special pocket 416a for a 3R jackpot, a special pocket 416a for a 7R jackpot, and a special pocket 416a for a 15R jackpot, and the rotor 414 may be controlled so that the special pocket 416a for the 15R jackpot moves at a very high speed through the position corresponding to the gate 435 during normal play (non-advantageous state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the special pocket 416a for the 15R jackpot, and when the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and an advantageous state is reached, the special pocket 416a for the 15R jackpot may be controlled to stop temporarily at the position corresponding to the gate 435, or to move at normal speed through the position corresponding to the gate 435.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism 741 (first bridge plate 744, second bridge plate 745) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first and second crossing plates 744 and 745, which normally oscillate, may change to an advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, and may stop temporarily at the advance position, or may spend more time at the advance position, making it easier for the game ball to enter the 15R ball entrance 731.

(j-6) The movable body (movable gadget 722, rotating body 414, type allocation mechanism 741, etc.) may also be configured to have a plurality of operating states (advantageous states). This may also be configured to be determined by the results of a predetermined operation lottery process. In this way, when the movable body is set to an operating state (advantageous state), the operation pattern determination means in this embodiment is configured by a function that determines which of the plurality of operation patterns is to be executed.

Furthermore, when a movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), it may be configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the special ball entry means (V entry passage 427, 730, etc.) and it is easier to get a V entry jackpot than when the movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Also, when a movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), it may be configured so that it is easier to get a predetermined type of special game state (for example, a 15R jackpot, which is the most advantageous for the player) out of multiple types of special game states (for example, a 15R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, a 3R jackpot) than when the movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, if a winning result is obtained by the activation assist lottery, during the activation start period before the movable role 722 is activated, the performance display device 42 or other performance means may be configured to be capable of executing an opening performance as a pre-activation performance that suggests that the movable role 722 will be activated.

In addition, this opening performance is performed after the static display when a variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and a static display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which a variable display is not performed), the opening performance is performed after the winning result is obtained from the operation assist lottery.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262 may be configured to include a performance pattern storage means for storing multiple performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, a performance pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the multiple performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means based on the establishment of an activation condition (for example, when a winning result is obtained through an activation assist lottery), and a performance control means capable of controlling a predetermined performance means based on the performance pattern selected by the performance pattern selection means.

This configuration makes it possible to vary the activation start period (e.g., the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when an activation condition is met) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an advantageous state.

(k-2) The activation start period from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when an activation condition is met) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an advantageous state may be made variable without performing the above-mentioned opening effect or other effects.

For example, the main control device 261 may be configured to include an operation pattern storage means for storing multiple operation patterns that determine the operation start period from when the operation conditions are met until the movable role 722 enters an operating state, an operation pattern selection means that can select one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the special gate switch 651, and a control means that can control the movable role 722 based on the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

(l) In addition to game effects using movable objects such as the movable role piece 722, the configuration may also be such that other game effects are performed.

(l-1) For example, a specific process advantageous to the player may be executed when a predetermined condition is met based on the detection of a game ball being discharged outside the internal area 401 through a discharge route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special ball entry detection switch 462) or the special guide passage 605 (special gate switch 651) without being guided to the first V winning passage 427, etc. The specific process execution means in this embodiment is constituted by the functions of the main control device 261, etc. that execute such processes.

This allows new gameplay to be provided by utilizing not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged through the discharge route (second route), resulting in a dramatic increase in interest for players.

(l-2) For example, a counting means is provided to count the number of game balls detected by ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) such as the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 or the special gate switch 651, and a predetermined condition is met when the count value reaches a predetermined number or more, or a predetermined lottery process is executed when the count value reaches a predetermined number or more, and a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and a specific process advantageous to the player is executed.

Such specific processing may include, for example, processing to lengthen the time that the movable device 722 remains in an activated state, processing to increase the probability of winning in the activation assist lottery, processing to make it easier for game balls to enter the special pocket 416a of the rotating body 414, and processing to make it easier for game balls to be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731 in the type lottery area 408.

(m) The small prize opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the blade member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 and the large prize opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the large prize opening opening member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 are not limited to the above embodiment.

(m-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 is configured with two opening and closing patterns, a "short small hit" and a "long small hit", but this is not limited thereto, and the blade member 404 may be configured with one or three or more opening and closing patterns.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade members 404 of the central winning unit 37 are opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win" and for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win", but the opening mode (opening time) of the blade members 404 is not limited to the above embodiment and may be configured to have other opening modes with different opening times.

(m-3) In the above embodiment, the opening and closing operation (opening operation) of the blade member 404 is performed only once (one round) for each small win (the result of one winning or losing lottery performed based on the ball detection by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), but this is not limited to the above, and the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 may be performed two or more times (multiple rounds) for each small win.

(m-4) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple opening and closing patterns with different numbers of opening and closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, such as a configuration having a first opening and closing pattern in which the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed once (one round) and a second opening and closing pattern in which the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice (two rounds). However, when a predetermined opening and closing pattern (for example, a long small win with an opening for 1.5 seconds) is performed among the multiple opening and closing patterns, it is preferable that the movable body such as the movable role 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening and closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short small win with an opening for 0.5 seconds).

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issue A. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the moving body would periodically or continuously perform a predetermined action unrelated to the game, or the moving body would perform a predetermined action every time the variable ball entry means was opened. As a result, the presentation related to the moving body could be monotonous, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the moving body tended to wane. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means A1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A ball entry means provided so that a game ball can enter (or pass through) the ball;
A chance ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the chance ball entry means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball-entry detection by the opportunity ball-entry detection means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring about a predetermined advantageous state, at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means A1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, this means is configured to determine by lottery whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, for example, the movable body will not operate constantly, either periodically or continuously, and it will not perform a predetermined operation every time a predetermined trigger occurs, such as when the variable ball entry means opens. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation related to the movable body from becoming monotonous and to increase the player's anticipation of the movable body operating.

In particular, in this means, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration without the need to provide a new complex mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism that performs a lottery based on the behavior of the game ball.

In addition, examples of the location of the "trigger ball entry means" include "within the internal area of the variable ball entry means," "within an area of the variable ball entry means that is different from the internal area," and "within the game area outside the variable ball entry means."

Means A2. The gaming machine described in means A1, characterized in that the trigger ball entry means is configured to allow a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game.

According to the above-mentioned means A2, by providing a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the trigger for the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the interest.

In addition, if the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to operate is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur and activate the movable body.

In response to this, according to the above-mentioned means A2, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Means A3. The gaming machine described in means A1 or A2, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means A4. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of means A1 to A3, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means A4, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

In addition, if a configuration is provided with a first flow route (the first first route) through which game balls that have passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means, and a second flow route (the second first route) through which game balls that have passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first flow route (the first first route), the overall proportion of game balls that flow down to the special ball entry means will be higher. In such a case, in consideration of the balance of interests between the player and the game hall, the probability of the occurrence of a special game state must be set low, which may reduce the interest of the player.

Means A5. A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means A5, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means A5, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means A5 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A4, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means A5 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to have multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means A6. A display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the trigger ball detection means and performs a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the activation lottery process;
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A5, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to bring the movable body into the specified advantageous state after a stopped display is made on the display means.

If the moving object were to suddenly move without warning, players who had not been paying close attention to the moving object would be unable to grasp the situation and would be at risk of becoming confused.

In response to this, means A6, by providing the display means, can make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the game presentation using the movable body, and further increase the interest of the player.

Means A7. A fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation display times;
A fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
The gaming machine described in means A6 is characterized by comprising a display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

The above-mentioned means A7 makes it possible to vary the time from when the display means starts to display the variable to when the display means stops. In addition, it is possible to vary the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means to when the movable body actually becomes advantageous.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Means A8. A gaming machine as described in any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means A8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means A9. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means A10. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A9, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue B. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the moving body would periodically or continuously perform a predetermined action regardless of the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the presentation related to the moving body would tend to be monotonous, causing players to lose interest in the moving body. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means B1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means that is capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring about a predetermined advantageous state when predetermined operating conditions are met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means.

According to the above-mentioned means B1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, in this means, by providing a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to move in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In addition, if the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to operate is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur and activate the movable body.

In response to this, the present invention provides a trigger ball entry means within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means B2. A predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area is provided,
The gaming machine described in means B1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the specified detection means, where the gaming ball detected by the specified detection means can be entered.

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on detection by the above-mentioned specified detection means, the movable body will operate at the same timing every time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means (internal area).

As a result, the presentation of the moving objects becomes monotonous, and it becomes easier for players to grasp the timing of the movements of the moving objects, which may lead to fraudulent behavior such as vibrating the gaming machine to coincide with that timing.

In response to this, the above-mentioned method B2 can prevent the effects related to the movable object from becoming monotonous and can also prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior.

Means B3. A trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means is provided;
A gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operating condition can be established when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means.

By using the above-mentioned means B3, it is not necessary to perform a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, thereby simplifying the control process.

Means B4. A chance ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the chance ball entry means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball-entry detection by the opportunity ball-entry detection means;
The gaming machine described in means B1 or B2 is characterized in that the operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means B4, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Means B5. A gaming machine as described in any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that a gaming ball that has entered (or passed through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (cannot enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means B6. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of means B1 to B5, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means B6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

Means B7. The gaming machine described in means B6, characterized in that it has a plurality of the second routes configured so that the time required for the gaming ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different.

If the movable body were configured to operate at a fixed timing each time from the time the game ball was allocated by the route allocation means, the presentation related to the movable body would become monotonous and the timing of the movement of the movable body would be easily grasped by the player, which could lead to fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B7, the operation start period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to the time when the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Note that "the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route allocation means to the trigger ball entry means is different."

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "plurality of second routes," or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes" may move toward a single trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means B8. The gaming machine described in means B6, characterized in that it is provided with a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means, if two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means and the movable body to be in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the route allocation means causes the game ball to flow down the first route, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B8, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the possibility remains that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match depending on whether the second game ball is allocated to the "first second route with a long time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a short time to reach the advantageous state", so the player can closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

Means B9. A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B9, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means B9, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means B9 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means B9 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to have multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means B10. A gaming machine as described in any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means B10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means B11. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B10, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means B12. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B11, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue C. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even when a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as multiple game balls entering the variable ball entry means at the same time in succession, the timing of the entry of these multiple game balls can easily cause problems, such as all of the multiple game balls heading toward the special ball entry means, or all of the multiple game balls not heading toward the special ball entry means but being guided to the discharge section or non-special ball entry means, etc.

In general, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are configured so that when a player has already acquired the right to a special gaming state, if a new gaming ball enters the special ball entry means, that special gaming state is not granted.

Therefore, even if two game balls consecutively enter the special ball entry means, two special game states are not granted, but only one special game state occurs, which may cause the player to have negative feelings such as loss, waste, or waste.

As a result, there is a concern that even if a favorable situation occurs for the player, such as when a special game state is granted, the player's interest may decrease.

Conversely, if all of the game balls were guided to the discharge section, etc., the player's expectations that, since multiple game balls entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, this would be advantageous in getting a game ball to enter the special ball entry means would not be met, and interest would likely decrease.

In this sense, there was a desire to further increase interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the excitement when multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means.

Means C1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
a first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of a game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
a movable body that is provided in an internal area of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing at least between an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route (can act on the game ball);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring about a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means C1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of the ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, this means is configured with a route allocation means that can allocate the destination of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means to a first route or a second route.

As a result, for example, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball will flow down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball will flow down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body even more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation that a special game state may occur by having multiple game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means C2. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means for maintaining the route allocation means in the first state,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that when a gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the first state, the route allocation means is configured to change to the second state due to the force received from the gaming ball.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means C2, in order to operate the above-mentioned movable body, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, and in order to cause the game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, it is necessary to change the route allocation means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

In other words, to operate the movable body, at least two game balls must be successively inserted into the variable ball entry means, the first preceding game ball must flow down the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the first state, and the second succeeding game ball must flow down the second route by the route allocation means changed to the second state.

As a result, gameplay can be made more reliable, in that it is more advantageous for the player to have multiple game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means than to have only one.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above-mentioned means C2, for example, "means C2. The route allocation means is,
A route allocating member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means (such as a biasing means) capable of maintaining the route allocation member in the first position,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that, when a gaming ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first position, the route distribution member is changed to the second position (for example, against the biasing force of a biasing means) by the force received from the gaming ball.

Means C3. The gaming machine described in means C2, characterized in that the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is placed in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body.

If the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the first route by the route allocation means and reach the movable body, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means C3 can prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and prevent a decline in the interest of the player.

The "time to reach advantageous state" only needs to be shorter than the "time to reach movable body" and is intended to include, for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly from the route allocation means (such as a configuration in which the distance to the opportunity ball entry means is zero).

In addition, one example of how the "movable object arrival time" can be increased is by increasing the distance the game ball needs to travel to pass through the "first route."

Alternatively or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed on the "first route." Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving on, or a configuration in which ribs or the like are used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow it to move on over time.

In addition, it is preferable that "the movable body arrival time from the time the game ball is caused to flow down the first route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the movable body is shorter than the advantageous end arrival time from the time the game ball is caused to flow down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body is placed in a predetermined advantageous state until the advantageous end arrival time ends."

If the "movable body arrival time" is longer than the "advantageous end arrival time," and two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body after the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

Means C4. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized by comprising a distribution drive means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is always allocated to either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball is allocated to the other route, then the outcome will be decided when the two game balls that enter in succession are alternately allocated by the route allocation means due to the relationship between the above-mentioned "time to reach advantageous state" and the above-mentioned "time to reach movable body" that is preset, which may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C4, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, it is not determined whether the first game ball will be allocated to the first route or the second route, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction can be suppressed.

As a result, players can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state, preventing a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means for maintaining the route allocation means in a reference state between the first state and the second state,
When the route allocation means is maintained in the reference state, the game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the reference state, the route allocation means is changed to the second state by a force received from the game ball,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that when a gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means maintained in the reference state, the route allocation means is configured to change to the first state due to the force received from the gaming ball.

The above-mentioned means C5 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means C4. In particular, this means does not require a drive means for driving the route allocation means, so a relatively simple configuration can be adopted, while realizing a configuration in which multiple (two) game balls flowing continuously are alternately caused to flow down different routes. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration and control, make it more compact, etc.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above-mentioned means C5, for example, "means C5. The route allocation means is,
A route allocation member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means (e.g., a biasing means) capable of maintaining the route allocation member in a reference position between the first position and the second position,
When the route allocating member is maintained in the reference position, the game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocation member maintained in the reference position, the route allocation member is changed to the second position by the force received from the game ball,
The gaming machine described in the means C1 is characterized in that, when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating member maintained in the reference position, the route allocating member is changed to the first position by the force received from the game ball.

Means C6. The gaming machine described in means C4 or C5, characterized in that it is provided with a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the first route by the route allocation means and reach the movable body, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means and the movable body to be in an advantageous state is shorter from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in an advantageous state than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the first route by the route allocation means, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C6, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route with a longer time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a shorter time to reach the advantageous state", so there remains a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match, allowing the player to closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "first second route" and the "second second route", or a game ball passing through each of the "first second route" or the "second second route" may move toward one trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means C7. A gaming machine as described in any one of means C1 to C6, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means C7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means C8. A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C8, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means C8, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means C8 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means C8 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after it starts to operate, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means C9. A gaming machine as described in any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means C9, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means C10. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means C1 to C9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means C11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means C1 to C10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue D. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body was configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when a gaming ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

As a result, in the past, players could figure out the timing of the moving object's movement and potentially commit fraud, such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In addition, the effects related to moving objects can easily become monotonous, and in this respect, there was a need for further improvements in interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent behavior and increase entertainment value.

Means D1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
and a movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined ball detection means),
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from at least a predetermined trigger (e.g., the establishment of the operating condition) to the movable body reaching the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the above-mentioned means D1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, in this means, by making variable the period (e.g., the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when the operating condition is met) until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the movable body does not operate at the same timing every time, and this makes it possible to prevent the game presentation using the movable body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the risk that a player will be able to figure out the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent conduct, such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Means D2. A means for triggering a ball to enter (or pass) the game ball that has passed through the specific area;
A timing ball entry detection means is provided for detecting a game ball that has entered the timing ball entry means,
The gaming machine described in means D1 is configured so that the operating condition can be established based on the detection of a gaming ball by the trigger ball entry detection means.

If the trigger ball entry means that activates the movable body is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or other material could be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to be committed, resulting in the activation of the movable body.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned method D2, the movable body is configured to operate due to the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunctions can be suppressed.

Here, for example, if the configuration is such that "when a game ball is detected by the trigger ball detection means, the operating condition is met," then it is not necessary to execute a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, and this can simplify the control process. In addition, it can also prevent fraudulent acts such as installing a fraudulent ROM with an altered program related to the lottery process.

Means D3. An actuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of actuation patterns that define an actuation start period from the establishment of the actuation condition to the time when the movable body is in the predetermined advantageous state;
The gaming machine described in means D2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operation pattern selection means which can select one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern memory means based on the detection of a gaming ball by the trigger ball entry detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means D3, a plurality of patterns of the activation start period (e.g., the opening period) are prepared, and a predetermined activation start period is selected from these by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the above-mentioned activation start period. In turn, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the action and effect of the above-mentioned means D1, etc. can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, this method eliminates the need to provide a complex mechanical selection mechanism in the variable ball entry means, and simplifies the structure of the variable ball entry means.

Means D4. During the operation start period, a performance means capable of executing a pre-performance (opening performance) that suggests that at least the movable body will be in the predetermined advantageous state;
A performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
The gaming machine described in means D3 is characterized in that it comprises a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation means based on a presentation pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

By using the above-mentioned means D4, an advance performance is performed that suggests that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player can be made aware in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player feels a sense of excitement as he does not know when the moving object will reach the predetermined advantageous state, and hopes that the moving object will reach the predetermined advantageous state at a time that is favorable to him. This allows the player to pay close attention to the behavior of the game ball as well as the game presentation related to the moving object, further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the activation start period from when the activation conditions are met until the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is variable, if the activation start period becomes relatively long, there is a risk that the player will feel anxious or angry that the movable body will not be in a predetermined advantageous state even though the activation conditions are met.

In response to this, the present method can prevent such problems from occurring and prevent players from losing interest.

Means D5. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball-entry detection means,
A gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D4, characterized in that the operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Means D6. A display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the trigger ball detection means and performs a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the activation lottery process;
A variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times;
A fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
A display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means D2 to D5, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to bring the movable body into the specified advantageous state after a stopped display is made on the display means.

According to the above-mentioned means D6, by providing the above-mentioned display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player feels a sense of excitement as they do not know whether the moving object will reach the desired advantageous state, and they will pay close attention to the moving display along with the behavior of the game ball, hoping that it will achieve an advantageous state, further increasing the player's interest.

As a result, the game presentation related to the moving object can attract more attention, further increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned means D6, the time from when the variable display starts on the display means until when the stopped display is made can be made variable. In other words, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until when the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the activation start period. In turn, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means D1, etc.

Means D7. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any of means D2 to D6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

Even if a situation favorable to the player arises, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means D7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

The "predetermined trigger" may be when the game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means.

Means D8. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a distribution driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means;
The gaming machine described in means D7 is characterized in that it has a plurality of second routes configured so that the time required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means differs.

If the movable body were configured to operate at a fixed timing each time from the time the game ball was allocated by the route allocation means, the presentation related to the movable body would become monotonous and the timing of the movement of the movable body would be easily grasped by the player, which could lead to fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D8, by providing multiple second routes, it is possible to vary the period from when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation means to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means.

In turn, the period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means (a specified trigger) to the time when the movable body actually attains an advantageous state can be made variable.

In addition, according to this method, the period from when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation means to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means can be made variable by a mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the interest.

Note that "the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route allocation means to the trigger ball entry means is different."

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "plurality of second routes," or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes" may move toward a single trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means D9. As the second routes,
The gaming machine described in means D8 is characterized in that it has a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the point at which the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches the specified advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the point at which the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means, if two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means and the movable body to be in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the route allocation means causes the game ball to flow down the first route, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, unless the movable body is maintained in the predetermined advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D9, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route with a longer time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a shorter time to reach the advantageous state", so there remains a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match, allowing the player to closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

The "second second route" only needs to take a shorter time for the game ball to pass through than the "first second route," and is intended to include, for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the trigger ball entry means directly from the route allocation means (such as a configuration in which the distance to the trigger ball entry means is zero).

In addition, one possible way to increase the time it takes for the gaming ball to pass through the "first second route" is to increase the distance the gaming ball travels to pass through the "first second route".

In place of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the gaming ball is installed on the "first second route." Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the gaming ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving on, or a configuration in which ribs or the like are used to stop the momentum of the gaming ball and allow it to move on over time.

Furthermore, a delay means such as that described above may be installed within the "first route" so that the time it takes for the game ball that has flowed down the first route to reach the movable body is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to pass through the "second second route."

Means D10. A gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means D10, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means D11. A gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D11, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means D11, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body, the movable body has not yet been activated, and even if the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means D11 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means D11 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means D12. A gaming machine as described in any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means D12, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means D13. The special game state granting means is configured to be capable of granting a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D12, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means D14. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D13, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue E. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a guide route that directs game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and also have a deviation route (discharge route) for discharging game balls that deviate from the guide route out of the internal area.

However, in the past, even if a gaming ball had entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, once the gaming ball had deviated from the guide route and been guided to a deviated route, it would not contribute to the game within the variable ball entry means and would simply be ejected. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means E1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A first route (guiding route) through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down the first route to the outside of the internal area;
A ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second route;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific process execution means capable of executing a specific process advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is met based on the detection of a gaming ball by the ball detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means E1, based on the detection of a game ball being discharged via the second route (discharge route), a specific process that is advantageous to the player is executed, such as making it easier for a special game state to occur.

This allows new gameplay to be provided by utilizing not only the behavior of game balls flowing down the first route (guidance route) toward the special ball entry means, but also game balls discharged via the second route, dramatically increasing the interest of players.

Means E2. The gaming machine described in means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means.

By using the above-mentioned means E2, it is possible to execute a specific process that is advantageous to the player every time a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means, thereby dramatically increasing the interest of the player.

Means E3. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process based on the detection by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means E3, it is no longer necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player every time a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the monotony of the specific process can be suppressed and the player's anticipation for the specific process being executed can be increased. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

Means E4. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met when the number of gaming balls counted by the counting means becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined number.

By using the above-mentioned means E4, even if the number of game balls that deviate from the first route (guidance route) and flow into the second route (discharge route) becomes relatively large, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Means E5. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

By using the above-mentioned means E5, it is no longer necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, and therefore the same effect as the above-mentioned means E3 is achieved.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a movable body is provided that can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
The specific process execution means includes:
A gaming machine described in any of means E1 to E5, characterized in that it is equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined action and bring it into a predetermined advantageous state when the predetermined condition is met.

According to the above-mentioned means E6, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

Means E7. A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine described in means E6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

In the configuration related to the above-mentioned means E6, for example, when the above-mentioned specified condition is about to be met, if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as multiple (e.g., two) game balls entering the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the second route (discharge route), there is a risk of a malfunction such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body may be.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means E7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct one game ball towards the first route, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

As a result, players will be able to watch with anticipation the behavior of the game balls as they are distributed by the route distribution means, further increasing interest.

Means E8. The gaming machine described in means E6 or E7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball is more easily allowed to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means E8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means E9. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
The gaming machine described in means E6 or E7 is characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means E10. A gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the one after the first gaming ball.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means E10, game balls other than the game ball that entered the special ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the specified condition does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the specified condition does not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game, trying to get the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, even after confirming that the predetermined conditions have been met. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means E10 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during an open state period following the open state period through which the opening/closing member has passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means E10 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the specified condition is met until the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to cause multiple game balls to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means E11. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A gaming machine described in any of means E1 to E10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue F. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, conventional variable ball entry means had entry ports (specific areas) in multiple locations, for example on both the left and right sides, so there were cases where game balls entered the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time.

Therefore, even if multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a time advantageous to the player, depending on the timing of the game balls' entry, they may get in each other's way, and none of the game balls may head for the special ball entry means, and the game balls may not flow in the route the player desires, which may reduce the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means F1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route that allows game balls that do not flow down the first route to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of a game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
a movable body that is capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route (can act on the game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the game machine into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one at a time;
A gaming machine characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding gaming balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means F1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of the ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in this method, by providing a trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In particular, this means is configured with a route allocation means that can allocate the destination of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means to a first route or a second route.

As a result, for example, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball will flow down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball will flow down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body even more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation that a special game state may occur by having multiple game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

In addition, in this means, the specific area is provided in only one location through which the game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passageway capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided in only one location, so that the game balls can be appropriately guided one by one to the route allocation means. This makes it possible to more reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means F2. The gaming machine described in means F1, characterized in that gaming balls that do not pass through the ball passage are configured to be unable to pass through the specific area.

If the ball passage were configured to allow game balls that do not pass through the ball passage to pass through the specific area, there is a risk that the game balls that do not pass through the ball passage may interfere with other game balls that pass through the ball passage and flow down toward the specific area. In contrast, the above-mentioned means F2 prevents game balls from passing through the specific area unless they pass through the ball passage, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction and further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means F1.

Means F3. The gaming machine described in means F1 or F2, characterized in that the ball passage is provided outside the variable ball entry means, either to the left or right of the opening and closing member.

According to the above-mentioned means F3, the game balls can be guided one by one into the opening and closing member. This makes it possible to prevent problems such as multiple game balls entering the opening and closing member at the same time and getting stuck.

Means F4. A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, characterized in that the ball passage is provided so that only gaming balls launched by the launching means with a predetermined strength can pass through.

According to the above-mentioned means F4, the ball passage is provided only at a position (e.g., to the right of the variable ball entry means) through which only game balls launched by the launching means with a predetermined strength (e.g., right-handed hit) can pass, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means F1, etc.

Means F5. A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F4, characterized in that it is provided with a restricting means for permitting the passage of a gaming ball in a predetermined direction in the specific area, while restricting the passage of the gaming ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the above-mentioned means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage in succession, the behavior of the first preceding game ball can prevent the first preceding game ball from colliding with the second following game ball, thereby preventing them from getting in each other's way. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned means F1 can be further improved. Here, the above-mentioned regulating means also includes a means that changes state from a first state to a second state due to the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F5, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means F6, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means F7. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means F7, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means F7, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means F7 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F6, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means F7 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means F8. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means F8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be created that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means F9. The special game state granting means is configured to be capable of granting a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means F10. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F9, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue G. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the presentation related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, for example, in which the movable body performs a predetermined action every time a gaming ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to wane. In this respect, further improvements in entertainment value are desired.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means G1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the game ball;
A first opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball entry means;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
A second opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball entry means;
a first flow route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second flow route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow to the second opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocating means (downstream route allocating means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route;
a movable body that is capable of changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area;
and a movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the game ball entering the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a specific state, the probability of achieving the predetermined advantageous state differs between when the gaming ball flows down the first flow route and when the gaming ball flows down the second flow route.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a game ball entering the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, "when a game ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means or the second trigger ball entry detection means" and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the first trigger ball entry detection means or the second trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means G1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this means, by providing various trigger ball entry means (various trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the action trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

Furthermore, this means is configured so that the probability of a predetermined advantageous state being reached differs when the gaming ball flows down the first flow route from when it flows down the second flow route. This makes the player pay more attention to the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the interest.

Means G2. The gaming machine described in means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route to reach the first opportunity ball entry means is different from the time or distance required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the second flow route to reach the second opportunity ball entry means.

By using the above-mentioned means G2, the period until the movable body can reach a predetermined advantageous state can be varied depending on whether the game ball flows down the first flow route or the second flow route.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine described in means G1 or G2, characterized in that it is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of gaming balls in the first flow route or the second flow route.

According to the above-mentioned means G3, even if the length of the first flow route and the second flow route is relatively short, the delay means can be provided to make it relatively long for the game ball to reach a predetermined position. As a result, the game space can be used more effectively. Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving forward, or a rib or the like is used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow it to move forward over time.

Means G4. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the detection of the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means,
The predetermined operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (a winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process,
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G3, characterized in that in the specific state, the probability of obtaining the specified lottery result differs when a gaming ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second trigger ball entry detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means G4, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Furthermore, this means is configured so that the rate at which a predetermined lottery result is obtained differs between when the gaming ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second trigger ball entry detection means, which encourages the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the gaming ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the interest.

Means G5. The route allocation means
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first flow-down route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second flow-down route,
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G4, characterized in that in the specific state, the route allocation means is configured to have a different ratio of being in the first state and being in the second state.

The above-mentioned means G5 can diversify the behavior of the game ball, and the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the interest. In addition, the route allocation means may be configured so that the proportion of the first state and the proportion of the second state can be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. A predetermined route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
In the specific state, a route allocating means (upstream route allocating means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route,
A gaming machine described in any one of means G1 to G5, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the specified route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means G6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

Means G7. A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G6, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means and/or the second trigger ball entry means) is configured so that it cannot flow down (cannot enter) into the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means G7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means G8. A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means G8, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route is entered by the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second In the case where a game ball enters the special ball entry means (a game ball that enters the special ball entry means) and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down the specified route passes the movable body, the movable body has not yet been activated, and even if the game ball that has flowed down the specified route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball to subsequently enter the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area after the next time) to flow down the specified route, and the action of the movable body will provide a chance for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above means G8 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in the open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means G8 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means G9. A gaming machine described in any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means G9, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be created that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means G10. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means G11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue H. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body was configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when a gaming ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

As a result, in the past, players could figure out the timing of the movement of the moving object, and could potentially commit fraud, such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In addition, the effects related to moving objects can easily become monotonous, and in this respect, there was a need to further increase the interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent behavior and increase entertainment value.

Means H1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
a movable body that is capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area (can act on the game ball);
A movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means;
and an opening/closing pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of opening/closing patterns is to be executed when controlling the opening/closing of the opening/closing member.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means H1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this method, by providing a trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In particular, in this method, multiple opening and closing patterns are provided for the variable ball entry means (opening and closing member), which changes the timing at which the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means. Therefore, even if the movable body is configured to operate at a fixed timing each time from a predetermined trigger, the timing at which the movable body acts on the gaming ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means will be different. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent activities such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movable body's operation.

When changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means, it is possible to consider a method of changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means by, for example, providing multiple operating patterns for the movable body and changing the probability of selecting the pattern to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means; however, changing the operating mode of the movable body, which changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a specified operation, to adjust the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means to the desired rate is extremely difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this regard, the present method makes it easier to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means.

Means H2. The gaming machine described in means H1, characterized in that when a predetermined opening/closing pattern is performed among the plurality of opening/closing patterns, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed.

According to the above-mentioned means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening and closing pattern is performed in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently, it becomes possible to cause more game balls to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time, and therefore, due to a synergistic effect with the configuration in which the movable body is likely to enter a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc., by increasing the expectation of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Means H3. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on a ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
A display means for starting a variable display based on the ball entering the trigger ball entering means and for performing a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activation lottery process;
A holding means is provided for holding the variable display on the display means a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine described in means H1 or H2 is characterized in that the operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

By using the above-mentioned means H3, the movable body does not have to move every time a predetermined trigger occurs, which enhances the effect of the above-mentioned means H1, etc., while preventing the presentation related to the movable body from becoming monotonous and increasing the player's anticipation of the movable body moving.

In addition, by providing a holding means, this method can increase the frequency with which the movable body operates. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Means H4. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H3, characterized in that it is provided with an actuation pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of actuation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is brought into the advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means H4, by providing multiple operating patterns for the movable body, the effect of the above-mentioned means H1 and the like can be further enhanced. Although it is very difficult to adjust the rate at which the balls enter the special ball entry means to a desired rate, the behavior of the game balls is diversified, which increases the interest and prevents the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior.

Means H5. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, characterized in that at least one of the multiple opening and closing patterns includes multiple opening and closing actions.

According to the above-mentioned means H5, the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently, so that more game balls can be allowed to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means.

Means H6. The gaming machine described in means H5, characterized in that at least one of the multiple opening and closing operations has an opening time longer than the interval (e.g., 0.6 seconds) between launches of gaming balls by the launching means.

By using the above-mentioned means H6, the effect of the above-mentioned means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means H7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means H8. A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H7, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means H8, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means H9. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means H9, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means H9, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means H9 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means H9 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means H10. A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means H10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means H11. The special game state granting means is configured to be capable of granting a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means H1 to H10, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means H12. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means H1 to H11, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

In addition, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means B1 to B12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11 may be implemented with any combination of at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means H1 to H12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means A1 to A10, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means B1 to B12, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means E1 to E11, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means F1 to F10, a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means G1 to G11, and a part or all of the configurations of any of the above means H1 to H12.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine equipped with an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning port, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) arranged within the gaming area."

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a predetermined gaming area (for example, the gaming area is composed of a gaming board surface, etc.) that extends in a substantially vertical direction and to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning port, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) that are arranged within the gaming area, and that is configured so that the behavior of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

(c) The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 32... Variable winning device, 33a... First start winning section, 33b... Second start winning section, 37... Central winning unit, 42... Performance display device, 44... Special gate display device, 224a, 224b... Start winning switch, 261... Main control device, 401... Internal area, 404... Blade member, 406... Route allocation area, 407... Win/lose lottery area, 408... Type lottery area, 409... Role operation lottery area, 410... Rotating body unit, 414... Rotating body, 42 7...first V winning passage, 437...internal ball entry detection switch, 461...first special ball entry detection switch, 602...fall passage, 603...route allocation member, 604...normal guide passage, 605...special guide passage, 650...special gate, 651...special gate switch, 721...bypass mechanism, 722...movable role-playing device, 731...15R ball entry port, 732...7R ball entry port, 733...3R ball entry port, 741...type allocation mechanism, 737...bypass passage, 738...second special ball entry detection switch.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
A variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter the ball;
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined ball is entered into the special ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is configured to allow only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the inner area,
This gaming machine is
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the ball;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
The game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entry means is configured to be changed by a variable means capable of changing the value of a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined route to the special ball entry means by changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
The variable means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means;
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one at a time;
A ball passage capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a restricting means is provided which allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball from passing in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game balls that have entered the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means are configured not to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter,
The ball passage is configured such that an entrance area is provided at only one location, and only the game ball that has passed through the entrance area can be guided to the specific area;
A game ball that does not pass through the entrance area of the ball passage is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second trigger ball entry means, the variable means acts on the gaming balls that pass through the specific area from the one after the one that entered, thereby changing the value of the gaming balls that flow down.

Images